Download SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
CD RECEIVER
4
2004
MA063
KD-LH401
Area suffix
E ----------- Continental Europe
EX --------------- Central Europe
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
PRECAUTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
COPYRIGHT © 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
No.MA063
2004/4
SPECIFICATION
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output
Front
50 W per channel
Rear
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS) Front
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Rear
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Load Impedance
Equalizer Control Range
Frequencies
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz,, 1 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 6 kHz, 12 kHz
Level
±10 dB
Frequency Response
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance
1 kΩ
Other terminals
SUBWOOFER
Changer control
Steering wheel remote input
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range
FM
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM
(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity
11.3 dBf (1.0 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity
16.3 dBf (1.8 µV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) 65 dB
[MW Tuner]
[LW Tuner]
Frequency Response
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation
30 dB
Capture Ratio
1.5 dB
Sensitivity
20 µV
Selectivity
35 dB
Selectivity
50 µV
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type
Compact disc player
Signal Detection System
Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)
Number of channels
2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Dynamic Range
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
98 dB
Wow and Flutter
Less than measurable limit
MP3 (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Max. Bit Rate
320 Kbps
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
Max. Bit Rate
192 Kbps
Power Requirement
Operating Voltage
GENERAL
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System
Negative ground
Allowable Operating Temperature
0ºC to +40ºC
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Installation Size (approx.)
182 mm × 52 mm × 159 mm
Panel Size (approx.)
188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm
Mass (approx.)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-2 (No.MA063)
1.6 kg (excluding accessories)
SECTION 1
PRECAUTION
1.1
Safety Precautions
!
Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore,
pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system.
!
Please use enough caution not to see the beam directly or touch it in case of an
adjustment or operation check.
(No.MA063)1-3
1.2
Preventing static electricity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), which occurs when static electricity stored in the body, fabric, etc. is discharged, can destroy the laser
diode in the traverse unit (optical pickup). Take care to prevent this when performing repairs.
1.2.1 Grounding to prevent damage by static electricity
Static electricity in the work area can destroy the optical pickup (laser diode) in devices such as laser products.
Be careful to use proper grounding in the area where repairs are being performed.
(1) Ground the workbench
Ground the workbench by laying conductive material (such as a conductive sheet) or an iron plate over it before placing the
traverse unit (optical pickup) on it.
(2) Ground yourself
Use an anti-static wrist strap to release any static electricity built up in your body.
(caption)
Anti-static wrist strap
1M
Conductive material
(conductive sheet) or iron plate
(3) Handling the optical pickup
• In order to maintain quality during transport and before installation, both sides of the laser diode on the replacement optical
pickup are shorted. After replacement, return the shorted parts to their original condition.
(Refer to the text.)
• Do not use a tester to check the condition of the laser diode in the optical pickup. The tester's internal power source can easily
destroy the laser diode.
1.3
Handling the traverse unit (optical pickup)
(1) Do not subject the traverse unit (optical pickup) to strong shocks, as it is a sensitive, complex unit.
(2) Cut off the shorted part of the flexible cable using nippers, etc. after replacing the optical pickup. For specific details, refer to the
replacement procedure in the text. Remove the anti-static pin when replacing the traverse unit. Be careful not to take too long a
time when attaching it to the connector.
(3) Handle the flexible cable carefully as it may break when subjected to strong force.
(4) It is not possible to adjust the semi-fixed resistor that adjusts the laser power. Do not turn it.
1.4
Attention when traverse unit is decomposed
*Please refer to "Disassembly method" in the text for the pickup unit.
• Apply solder to the short land before the flexible wire is disconnected from the connector on the pickup unit.
(If the flexible wire is disconnected without applying solder, the pickup may be destroyed by static electricity.)
• In the assembly, be sure to remove solder from the short land after connecting the flexible wire.
Short-circuit point
(Soldering)
Flexible wire
Pickup
1-4 (No.MA063)
1.5
Important for laser products
5.CAUTION : If safety switches malfunction, the laser is able
1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.DANGER : Invisible laser radiation when open and inter
lock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
3.CAUTION : There are no serviceable parts inside the
Laser Unit. Do not disassemble the Laser Unit. Replace
to function.
6.CAUTION : Use of controls, adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified here in may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
the complete Laser Unit if it malfunctions.
4.CAUTION : The CD,MD and DVD player uses invisible
laser radiation and is equipped with safety switches which
Please use enough caution not to
see the beam directly or touch it
in case of an adjustment or operation
check.
!
prevent emission of radiation when the drawer is open and
the safety interlocks have failed or are defeated. It is
dangerous to defeat the safety switches.
REPRODUCTION AND POSITION OF LABELS
WARNING LABEL
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION : Visible and Invisible
laser radiation when open and
interlock failed or defeated.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO
BEAM.
(e)
ADVARSEL : Synlig og usynlig
laserstråling når maskinen er
åben eller interlocken fejeler.
Undgå direkte eksponering til
stråling.
(d)
VARNING : Synlig och
osynling laserstrålning när
den öppnas och spärren är
urkopplad. Betrakta ej
strålen.
(s)
VARO : Avattaessa ja suojalukitus
ohitettuna tai viallisena olet alttiina
näkyvälle ja näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle. Vältä säteen
kohdistumista suoraan itseesi. (f)
(No.MA063)1-5
SECTION 2
SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
This service manual does not describe SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS.
1-6 (No.MA063)
SECTION 3
DISASSEMBLY
3.1
Main body section
3.1.1 Removing the front panel assembly
(See Fig.1)
(1) Push the detach button in the lower right part of the front
panel assembly.
(2) Remove the front panel assembly.
Front panel assembly
Detach button
Fig.1
3.1.2 Removing the heat sink
(See Fig.2)
(1) From the left side of the main body, remove the two screws
A and three screws B attaching the heat sink.
A
B
A
Heat sink
Fig.2
(No.MA063)1-7
3.1.3 Removing the top chassis assembly
(See Figs.3 to 6)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the heat
sink.
Reference:
Remove the front panel assembly as required.
(1) From the bottom side of the main body, remove the two
screws C attaching the top chassis assembly to the bottom
chassis assembly. (See Fig.3.)
(2) From the both and rear sides of the main body, remove the
four screws D attaching the top chassis assembly to the
bottom chassis assembly. (See Figs.4 to 6.)
(3) Lift the top chassis assembly in the direction of the arrow,
disconnect the connector CN501 on the mechanism control board from the connector CN702 on the main board.
(See Figs.5 and 6.)
(4) Take out the top chassis assembly from the bottom chassis
assembly.
Bottom chassis assembly
C
C
Top chassis assembly
Fig.3
Top chassis assembly
D
Bottom chassis assembly
Fig.4
Mechanism control board
Top chassis assembly
CN501
D
CN702
Main board
Bottom chassis assembly
Fig.5
Top chassis assembly
D
D
Bottom chassis assembly
Fig.6
1-8 (No.MA063)
Rear bracket
3.1.4 Removing the front chassis
(See Figs.7 and 8)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the front
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.
(1) From the both sides of the top chassis assembly, remove
the two screws E attaching the front chassis.
Top chassis assembly
E
Front chassis
Fig.7
Top chassis assembly
E
Front chassis
Fig.8
3.1.5 Removing the mechanism control board
(See Fig.9)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.
(1) Disconnect the card wire from the connector CN601 on the
mechanism control board.
(2) Remove the five screws F attaching the mechanism control
board.
(3) Release the joints a and b, remove the mechanism control
board.
Mechanism control board
CN601
F
F
a
b
F
Fig.9
(No.MA063)1-9
3.1.6 Removing the CD mechanism assembly
(See Fig.10)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.
Top chassis
G
Reference:
Remove the mechanism control board as required.
(1) From the inside of the top chassis assembly, remove the
three screws G attaching the CD mechanism assembly.
(2) Take out the CD mechanism assembly from the top chassis.
CD mechanism assembly
G
G
Fig.10
3.1.7 Removing the main board
(See Figs.11 and 12)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front
panel assembly, heat sink and top chassis assembly.
(1) From the rear side of the bottom chassis assembly, remove
the two screws H attaching the rear bracket to the bottom
chassis assembly. (See Fig.11.)
(2) From the top side of the bottom chassis assembly, remove
the two screws J attaching the main board to the bottom
chassis assembly. (See Fig.12.)
(3) Release the stopper of the connector CN701 on the main
board in an upward direction, disconnect the card wire from
the connector CN701. (See Fig.12.)
(4) Disconnect the wire from the connector of the gear bracket
unit. (See Fig.12.)
(5) Disconnect the wire from the connector CN951 on the main
board. (See Fig.12.)
Rear bracket
H
Bottom chassis assembly
Fig.11
Gear bracket unit
Bottom chassis assembly
Connector
Wire holders Card wire
Reference:
After connecting the wires, fix the wires with the wire
holders.
(6) Take out the main board from the bottom chassis assembly.
CN701
Stopper
J
J
Main board
CN951
Fig.12
1-10 (No.MA063)
Wires
3.1.8 Removing the rear bracket
(See Fig.13)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front
panel assembly, heat sink, top chassis assembly and main
board.
(1) From the rear side of the main board, remove the wires
from the rear bracket in the direction of the arrow.
(2) Remove the two screws K and screw L attaching the rear
bracket to the main board.
Wire
Main board
Wire holder
Wire
Rear bracket
Slots
Rear bracket
K
L
K
Fig.13
3.1.9 Removing the gear bracket unit
(See Fig.14.)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front
panel assembly, heat sink, top chassis assembly and main
board.
(1) From the top side of the bottom chassis assembly, remove
the screw M attaching the FPC guide to the bottom chassis.
(2) Remove the five screws N attaching the gear bracket unit
to the bottom chassis.
Gear bracket unit
Bottom chassis
Reference:
When attaching the screws M and N, apply a locking
agent them.
(3) Take out the gear bracket unit from the bottom chassis.
N
N
M
FPC guide
Fig.14
(No.MA063)1-11
3.1.10 Removing the front board
(See Figs.15 to 18)
• Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the front
panel assembly.
(1) From the rear side of the front panel assembly, remove the
four screws P attaching the rear cover assembly to the front
panel assembly. (See Fig.15.)
(2) Release the twelve joints c of the front panel assembly and
remove the rear cover assembly. (See Fig.16.)
(3) From the left side of the front panel assembly, pull out the
knob in the direction of the arrow 2 while pulling the front
board in the direction of the arrow 1. (See Fig.17.)
(4) Take out the front board from the front panel assembly.
(See Fig.18.)
Note:
When removing the rear cover assembly and front board, be
careful not to lose the comp. spring. (See Fig.18.)
P
Rear cover assembly
P
P
Fig.15
Rear cover assembly
joints c
joints c
joints c
joints c
Fig.16
Front board
Front panel assembly
Knob
1
2
Fig.17
Front panel assembly
Front board
Comp. spring
Fig.18
1-12 (No.MA063)
3.2
CD Mechanism section
3.2.1 Removing the top cover
(See Figs.1 and 2)
(1) Remove the four screws A on the both side of the body.
(2) Lift the front side of the top cover and move the top cover
backward to release the two joints a.
A
Top cover
Joints a
A
A
Fig.1
Joints a
Top cover
Fig.2
(No.MA063)1-13
3.2.2 Removing the connector board
(See Figs.3 to 5)
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting the flexible wire from the pickup, solder
the short-circuit point on the pickup. No observance of this instruction may cause damage of the pickup.
(1) Remove the screw B fixing the connector board.
(2) Solder the short-circuit point on the pickup.
(3) Disconnect the flexible wire from the pickup.
(4) Move the connector board in the direction of the arrow to
release the two joints b.
(5) Unsolder the wires on the connector board if necessary.
Wires
B
Connector board
CAUTION:
Unsolder the short-circuit point after reassembling.
Joints b
Short-circuit point
Fig.3
Pickup
Short-circuit point
(Soldering)
Flexible wire
Pickup
Fig.4
Connector board
Flexible wire
Frame
Fig.5
1-14 (No.MA063)
B
3.2.3 Removing the DET switch
(See Figs.6 and 7)
(1) Extend the two tabs c of the feed sw. holder and pull out
the switch.
(2) Unsolder the DET switch wire if necessary.
DET
switch
Connector
board
Pickup
Fig.6
Tab c
DET switch
DET switch wire
Tab c
Feed sw. holder
Fig.7
(No.MA063)1-15
3.2.4 Removing the chassis unit
(See Figs.8 and 9)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover and connector board.
(1) Remove the two suspension springs (L) and (R) attaching
the chassis unit to the frame.
Chassis unit
Suspension spring (L)
Suspension spring (R)
Frame
CAUTION:
• The shape of the suspension spring (L) and (R) are different. Handle them with care.
• When reassembling, make sure that the three shafts
on the underside of the chassis unit are inserted to the
dampers certainly.
Suspension spring (R)
Suspension spring (L)
Fig.8
Chassis unit
Shaft
Shafts
Damper
Damper
Frame
Damper
Fig.9
1-16 (No.MA063)
3.2.5 Removing the clamper assembly
(See Figs.10 and 11)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover.
(1) Remove the clamper arm spring.
(2) Move the clamper assembly in the direction of the arrow to
release the two joints d.
Clamper arm
spring
Joint d
Clamper assembly
Fig.10
Chassis rivet
assembly
Joint d
Clamper arm spring
Clamper assembly
Joint d
Joint d
Chassis rivet assembly
Fig.11
(No.MA063)1-17
3.2.6 Removing the loading / feed motor assembly
(See Figs.12 and 13)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, connector board and chassis unit.
(1) Remove the screw C and move the loading / feed motor assembly in the direction of the arrow to remove it from the
chassis rivet assembly.
(2) Disconnect the wire from the loading / feed motor assembly
if necessary.
CAUTION:
When reassembling, connect the wire from the loading /
feed motor assembly to the flame as shown in Fig.12.
Loading / feed motor assembly
Fig.12
Loading / feed motor assembly
C
Fig.13
1-18 (No.MA063)
3.2.7 Removing the pickup unit
(See Figs.14 to 18)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, connector board and chassis unit.
(1) Remove the screw D and pull out the pu. shaft holder from
the pu. shaft.
(2) Remove the screw E attaching the feed sw. holder.
(3) Move the part e of the pickup unit upward with the pu. shaft
and the feed sw. holder, then release the joint f of the feed
sw. holder in the direction of the arrow. The joint g of the
pickup unit and the feed rack is released, and the feed sw.
holder comes off.
(4) Remove the pu. shaft from the pickup unit.
(5) Remove the screw F attaching the feed rack to the pickup
unit.
3.2.8 Reattaching the pickup unit
(See Figs.14 to 17)
(1) Reattach the feed rack to the pickup unit using the screw F.
(2) Reattach the feed sw. holder to the feed rack while setting
the joint g to the slot of the feed rack and setting the joint f
of the feed rack to the switch of the feed sw. holder correctly.
(3) As the feed sw. holder is temporarily attached to the pickup
unit, set to the gear of the joint g and to the bending part of
the chassis (joint h) at a time.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the part i on the underside of the feed
rack is certainly inserted to the slot j of the change lock
lever.
(4) Reattach the feed sw. holder using the screw E.
(5) Reattach the pu. shaft to the pickup unit. Reattach the pu.
shaft holder to the pu. shaft using the screw D.
Pickup unit
Part e
Feed rack
Feed sw. holder
Fig.15
Pu. shaft
Part i Pickup unit
D
E
Slot j
Joint g
Joint f
Joint h
Pu. shaft holder
Feed sw. holder
Fig.16
F
Feed rack
Feed sw. holder
Pickup unit
Joint f
E
Fig.17
Pu. shaft
Pickup unit
Joint g
Joint g
D
Pu. shaft holder Pickup unit
Fig.14
Part e
Joint f
Feed rack
Feed sw. holder
Fig.18
(No.MA063)1-19
3.2.9 Removing the trigger arm
(See Figs.19 and 20)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, connector board and clamper unit.
(1) Turn the trigger arm in the direction of the arrow to release
the joint k and pull out upward.
Joint k
Trigger arm
CAUTION:
When reassembling, insert the part m and n of the trigger
arm into the part p and q at the slot of the chassis rivet
assembly respectively and join the joint k at a time.
Chassis rivet assembly
Fig.19
Part p
Trigger arm
Part q
Part m
Part n
Chassis
rivet
assembly
Fig.20
3.2.10 Removing the top plate assembly
(See Fig.21)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, connector board, chassis unit, and clamper assembly.
(1) Remove the screw H.
(2) Move the top plate assembly in the direction of the arrow to
release the two joints r.
(3) Unsolder the wire marked s if necessary.
Top plate assembly
H
Joints r
s
Fig.21
1-20 (No.MA063)
3.2.11 Removing the mode sw. / select lock arm
(See Figs.22 and 23)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
plate assembly.
(1) Bring up the mode sw. to release from the link plate (joint t)
and turn in the direction of the arrow to release the joint u.
(2) Unsolder the wire of the mode sw. marked s if necessary.
(3) Turn the select lock arm in the direction of the arrow to release the two joints v.
(4) The select lock arm spring comes off the select lock arm at
the same time.
Link plate
Joint t
Mode sw.
Select lock arm
Joint u
s
Fig.22
Select lock arm
Top plate
Hook w
Select lock arm
Top plate
Select lock
arm spring
Joints v
Link plate
Fig.23
(No.MA063)1-21
3.2.12 Reassembling the mode sw. / select lock arm
(See Figs.24 to 26)
Select lock arm spring
REFERENCE:
Reverse the above removing procedure.
(1) Reattach the select lock arm spring to the top plate and set
the shorter end of the select lock arm spring to the hook w
on the top plate.
(2) Set the other longer end of the select lock arm spring to the
boss x on the underside of the select lock arm, and join the
select lock arm to the slots (joint v). Turn the select lock
arm as shown in the figure.
(3) Reattach the mode sw. while setting the part t to the first
peak of the link plate gear, and join the joint u.
Hook w
Joint v
Joint v
Select lock arm
Boss x
CAUTION:
When reattaching the mode sw., check if the points y and
z are correctly fitted and if each part operates properly.
Fig.24
Joint t
Point y
Link plate
Point z
Fig.25
Mode sw.
Select
lock arm
Joint t
Link plate
1-22 (No.MA063)
Joint u
Fig.26
3.2.13 Removing the select arm R / link plate
(See Figs.27 and 28)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
plate assembly.
(1) Bring up the select arm R to release from the link plate
(joint a') and turn as shown in the figure to release the two
joints b' and joint c'.
(2) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow to release
the joint d'. Remove the link plate spring at the same time.
Select arm R
Link plate
Joint c'
Joint b'
Joint r
Joint b'
REFERENCE:
Before removing the link plate, remove the mode sw..
Joint a'
Fig.27
Link plate spring
Top plate
Joint d'
Link plate
Fig.28
3.2.14 Reattaching the Select arm R / link plate
(See Figs.29 and 30)
REFERENCE:
Reverse the above removing procedure.
(1) Reattach the link plate spring.
(2) Reattach the link plate to the link plate spring while joining
them at joint d'.
(3) Reattach the joint a' of the select arm R to the first peak of
the link plate while joining the two joints b' with the slots.
Then turn the select arm R as shown in the figure. The top
plate is joined to the joint c'.
CAUTION:
When reattaching the select arm R, check if the points e'
and f' are correctly fitted and if each part operates properly.
Link plate spring
Select arm R
Joint c'
Joint d'
Joint b'
Joint b' Joint a'
Fig.29
Joint a'
Link plate
Point e'
Point f'
Fig.30
(No.MA063)1-23
3.2.15 Removing the loading roller assembly
(See Figs.31 to 33)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the
clamper assembly and top plate assembly.
(1) Push inward the loading roller assembly on the gear side
and detach it upward from the slot of the joint g' of the lock
arm rivet assembly.
(2) Detach the loading roller assembly from the slot of the joint
h' of the lock arm rivet assembly.
Loading roller assembly
Roller guide
spring
Loading roller assembly
Part k'
The roller guide comes off the gear section of the loading
roller assembly.
Remove the roller guide and the HL washer from the shaft
of the loading roller assembly.
(3) Remove the screw J attaching the lock arm rivet assembly.
(4) Push the shaft at the joint i' of the lock arm rivet assembly
inward to release the lock arm rivet assembly from the slot
of the L side plate.
(5) Extend the lock arm rivet assembly outward and release
the joint j' from the boss of the chassis rivet assembly. The
roller guide springs on both sides come off at the same
time.
CAUTION:
When reassembling, reattach the left and right roller
guide springs to the lock arm rivet assembly before reattaching the lock arm rivet assembly to the chassis rivet
assembly. Make sure to fit the part k' of the roller guide
spring inside of the roller guide. (Refer to Fig.34.)
Roller guide
spring
Fig.32
Chassis rivet assembly
Boss
Roller guide
HL washer
Loading roller assembly
L side plate
J
Roller guide spring
Roller guide
Joint h'
Lock arm rivet assembly
Joint j'
Roller guide spring
Fig.33
Roller guide spring
Joint g'
Joint i'
Roller guide
HL washer
Roller shaft assembly
Loading roller assembly
Roller guide spring
Lock arm rivet assembly
Fig.31
Loading roller
Lock arm rivet assembly
1-24 (No.MA063)
Roller guide spring
Fig.34
3.2.16 Removing the loading gear 5, 6 and 7
(See Figs.35 and 36)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, chassis unit, pickup unit and top plate assembly.
(1) Remove the screw K attaching the loading gear bracket.
The loading gear 6 and 7 come off the loading gear bracket.
(2) Pull out the loading gear 5.
K
Loading gear bracket
Loading gear 6
Loading gear 5
Loading gear 3
Fig.35
K
Loading gear bracket
Loading gear 6
Loading gear 5
Loading gear 7
Fig.36
(No.MA063)1-25
3.2.17 Removing the gears
(See Figs.37 to 40)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, chassis unit, top plate assembly and pickup unit.
• Pull out the loading gear 3. (See Fig.35.)
(1) Pull out the feed gear.
(2) Move the loading plate assembly in the direction of the arrow to release the L side plate from the two slots m' of the
chassis rivet assembly. (See Fig.37.)
(3) Detach the loading plate assembly upward from the chassis rivet assembly while releasing the joint n'. Remove the
slide hook and loading plate spring from the loading plate
assembly.
(4) Pull out the loading gear 2 and remove the change lock lever.
(5) Remove the E ring and washer attaching the change gear
2.
(6) The change gear 2, change gear spring and adjusting
washer come off.
(7) Remove the loading gear 1.
(8) Move the change plate rivet assembly in the direction of the
arrow to release from the three shafts of the chassis rivet
assembly upward. (See Fig.38.)
(9) Detach the loading gear plate rivet assembly from the shaft
of the chassis rivet assembly upward while releasing the
joint p'. (See Figs.38 and 40.)
(10) Pull out the loading gear 4.
Joint p'
Change plate
rivet assembly
Loading gear 4
Shafts
Loading gear plate
rivet assembly
Shaft
Loading gear 2
Loading gear 1
E ring
Chassis rivet assembly
Change gear 2
Fig.38
Loading plate assembly
Joint n'
Slide hook
Loading plate spring
L side plate
Slot m'
Slot m'
L side plate
Loading plate assembly
Joint n'
Slot m'
Chassis rivet assembly
Fig.39
Slot m'
Feed gear
E ring
Chassis rivet assembly
Fig.37
Washer
Loading gear 1
Change gear 2
Loading gear 2
Change gear
spring
Adjusting
washer
Change plate
rivet assembly
Change lock lever
Loading gear 4
Chassis rivet assembly
Loading gear plate rivet
assembly
Fig.40
1-26 (No.MA063)
3.2.18 Removing the turn table / spindle motor
(See Figs.41 and 42)
• Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top
cover, connector board, chassis unit and clamper assembly.
(1) Remove the two screws L attaching the spindle motor assembly through the slot of the turn table on top of the body.
(2) Unsolder the wire on the connector board if necessary.
Turn table
L
Fig.41
L
Turn table
Spindle motor
Fig.42
(No.MA063)1-27
SECTION 4
ADJUSTMENT
4.1
Adjustment method
„ Test instruments required for adjustment
(1) Digital oscilloscope (100MHz)
(2) Electric voltmeter
(3) Digital tester
(4) Tracking offset meter
(5) Test Disc JVC :CTS-1000
(6) Extension cable for check
EXTSH002-22P × 1
„ Standard measuring conditions
Power supply voltage
Load impedance
Output Level
DC14.4V(10.5 to 16V)
20KΩ(2 Speakers connection)
Line out 2.0V (Vol. MAX)
„ Dummy load
Exclusive dummy load should be used for AM,and FM. For FM
dummy load,there is a loss of 6dB between SSG output and
antenna input.The loss of 6dB need not be considered since
direct reading of figures are applied in this working standard.
„ Standard volume position
Balance and Bass &Treble volume : lndication"0"
Loudness : OFF
„ How to connect the extension cable for adjusting
Caution:
Be sure to attach the heat sink and rear bracket onto the power amplifier IC and regulator IC respectively, before supply the power.
If voltage is applied without attaching these parts, the power amplifier IC and regulator IC will be destroyed by heat.
Extension cable: EXTSH002-22P
Heat sink
Rear bracket
CN501
1-28 (No.MA063)
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1
Feed section
Is 5v or 0V at IC621
pin 40?
NO
Is the wiring for IC621
pin 40 correct?
YES
Is 5V present at IC681
pin 6?
NO
Check CD8V.
YES
YES
Is 4V present at both
sides of the feed motor?
NO
Is 6V or 2V present at YES
IC681 pins 17 and 18?
YES
Check the feed motor
connection wiring.
NO
Check the feed motor.
5.2
Check the vicinity of
IC621.
NO
Check IC681.
Focus section
When the lens is
moving:
NO
Check the circuits in
the vicinity of IC681
pins 1 and 2.
4V
Does the S-search
waveform appear at
IC681 pins 13 and 14?
YES
Check the pickup and
its connections.
YES
5.3
Spindle section
Is the disk rotated?
NO
Is 4V present between
IC681 pins 15 and 16?
YES
NO
Is 4V present at IC621
pin 41?
YES
Does the RF signal
appear at IC601 pin 19?
YES
Is the RF waveform
at IC601 pin 19 distorted?
Check the spindle motor
and its wiring.
NO
NO
NO
Check IC621.
YES
Check the vicinity of
IC681.
Check the circuits in
the vicinity of IC601
or the pickup.
YES
Proceed to the Tracking
section
5.4
Tracking section
When the disc is rotated
at first:
NO
Check the circuits in
the vicinity of IC601
pins 2 to 12.
NO
Check the pickup and
its connections.
Approx. 1.2V
Is the tracking error
signal output at IC601
pin 11?
YES
Check IC621.
(No.MA063)1-29
5.5
Signal processing section
Is the sound output from NO
both channels (L, R)?
YES
Normal
No sound from either
channel.
NO
Compare the L-ch and
R-ch to locate the
defective point.
NO
Is 9V present at IC901
pin 13?
YES
Is 9V present at IC161
pin 26?
YES
Check the connection
between IC901 pin 13
and IC161 pin 26.
YES
Is the audio signal
(including sampling
output components)
output to IC572 pins 1
and 7 during playback?
NO
Check IC572 and its
peripheral circuits.
NO
Check IC161 and its
peripheral circuits.
YES
Is the audio signal
output at IC161 pins 18
to 21 during playback?
YES
Is the audio signal output NO
at IC361/IC381 pins 12
and 13 during playback?
YES
Check the power amp.
IC301.
1-30 (No.MA063)
Check IC361/IC381 and
its peripheral circuits.
NO
Check IC901 and its
peripheral circuits.
5.6
Maintenance of laser pickup
5.7
(1) Cleaning the pick up lens
Before you replace the pick up, please try to clean the lens
with a alcohol soaked cotton swab.
(2) Life of the laser diode
When the life of the laser diode has expired, the following
symptoms will appear.
• The level of RF output (EFM output: amplitude of eye
pattern) will be low.
Is RF output
1.3 0.4Vp-p?
Replacement of laser pickup
Turn of the power switch and, disconnect the
power cord.
Replace the pickup with a normal one. (Refer
to "Removing the pickup unit" on the previous page.)
NO
Replace it.
YES
Plug the power cord in, and turn the power on.
At this time, check that the laser emits for about
seconds and the objective lens moves up and down.
Note: Do not observe the laser beam directly.
OK
(3) Semi-fixed resistor on the APC PC board
The semi-fixed resistor on the APC printed circuit board
which is attached to the pickup is used to adjust the laser
power.Since this adjustment should be performed to match
the characteristics of the whole optical block, do not touch
the semi-fixed resistor.
If the laser power is lower than the specified value, the laser diode is almost worn out, and the laser pickup should
be replaced. If the semi-fixed resistor is adjusted while the
pickup is functioning normally, the laser pickup may be
damaged due to excessive current.
Play a disc.
Check the eye-pattern at
RF test point.
Finish.
(No.MA063)1-31
5.8
16 PIN CORD DIAGRAM
Black
RD
Green
Red
VI
Violet
BL
Blue
GY
Gray
WH 5
WH
White
YL
Yellow
GN 7
BR
Brown
OR
Orange
NC
9
2 VI/BK
VI
12 YL
NC 11
4 GY/BK
GY 3
14 OR/WH BL/WH 13
6 WH/BK
16 BK
8 GN/BK
RD 15
BK
GN
1
10 BR
1 VI
RR+
2 VI/BK
RR-
3 GY
FR+
4 GY/BK
FR-
5 WH
FL+
6 WH/BK
FL-
7 GN
RL+
8 GN/BK
RL-
10 BR
TEL
12 YL
MEMORY
13 BL/WH
REMOTE
14 OR/WH
ILL
15 RD
ACC
16 BK
GND
MEMORY BACKUP
DIRECT TO BATTERY
+12Volt
ACC + 12Volt
GROUND
Antenna
ACC
ACC
Line
FR
Front
Right
FL
Front
Left
TEL
RL
Rear
Left
GND
Ground
MEMORY
Memory
ILL
1-32 (No.MA063)
Auto
Rear
REMOTE
Right
ANT
RR
Remote out
Illuminations Control
Telephone
Muting
Backup
Battery+
(No.MA063)1-33
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
AV & MULTIMEDIA COMPANY CAR ELECTRONICS CATEGORY 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan
(No.MA063)
Printed in Japan
WPC
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
CD RECEIVER
KD-LH401
CD-ROM No.SML200404
Area suffix
E ----------- Continental Europe
EX --------------- Central Europe
Contents
Block diagram
Standard schematic diagrams
Printed circuit boards
COPYRIGHT
2-1
2-2
2-5, 6
2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.
No.MA063SCH
2004/4
Safety precaution
!
Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore,
pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system.
!
Please use enough caution not to see the beam directly or touch it in case of an
adjustment or operation check.
Block diagram
IC681
CD DRIVER
IC701
CONTROLLER
MP3DA
MP3CK
MP3STB
MP3RST
CDON
LD/FE
IC503
J-BUS BUFF
BUSSI/SO
BUSCLK
IC703
EPROM
LCD
MODULE
DB0 to DB7
OSC,RES,CS
RS,WR,RD
LED0 to LED6
TRIMLED
D401 to D422
INDICATOR
LED
VOL1,VOL2
CL1
CL2
CL3
A0 to A19
D0 to D7
RE,WE
EXROM,CS1
ROMCNT
IC801
LCD
DRIVER
KEY0 to KEY2
KEYIN
S600 to S617
KEY
MATRIX
REM
RST
VOLDA
VOLCK
VOLMUTE
LPF1
LPF2
IC251
SUB OUT
AMP
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
IC271
SWITCH
STEERING
REMOTE
LINE IN
CD
CHANGER
SBRST
REMOCON
DISPCK,DISPDA
DISPCE
SBRST
BUSSO
BUSI/O
BUSCLK
BUSINT
SI/SO
EFD-OUT1
EFD-OUT2
IC801
J-BUS
BUFF
SI/SO
SCK
IC951
MOTOR
DRIVER
OUT1
OUT2
DOOR
MOTOR
SWITCH
IC803
RESET
SBRST
KEYDA
DISPCE,DISPDA
DISPCK
CN701
Q408 to Q413
Q420 to Q425
DRIVER
SWL
SWR
E2PROMDI
E2PROM DO
E2PROM CK
IC805
REMOCON
CN801
D451,D453
BACK
LIGHT
IC802
FLASH
ROM
JS801
ENCODER
LIN.L
LIN.R
SPK
BATTERY
IC901
REGULATOR
STEERINGREM.
IC702
RESET
R3
G3
B3
EACH
BLOCK
CH.L
CH.R
CDRESET
B.DET,P.DET
CDMUTE,CDREQ
IC501
CPU
BUSSO,BUSSI
BUSIO,/BUSIO
BUSSCK
CD RESET
PON,PS2
CDMUTE,CDREQ
IC502
EPROM
IC161
E.VOLUME
CN901
FMO
DMO
TRO
FOO
EQCLK
EQDATA
EQLA
ACINL
ACINR
CN251
MP3DA
MP3CK
RDSDA
RDSSCK
IC201
EQ
CN961
IC652
MP3 DEC
BUS0 to BUS3
BUCK,CCE
DSPPST
FM/AM
PLLDI
PLLCK
PLLDA
PLLCE
SM,SQ
SD/ST
SEEK
AFCK
CF,MRC
IC301
POWER
AMP
FL+, FLFR+, FRRL+, RLRR+, RR-
CN141
LOAD/FEED+
LOAD/FEEDSPINDLE+
SPINDLETRACKING+
TRACKINGFOCUS+
FOCUSVREF
FOCUS+
FOCUSTRACKING+
TRACKINGVA,VB,VE,VF
MD,LD
ACOUTL
ACOUTR
IC71
RDS
DATA
BCK
LRCK
IC621
D.SERVO
& DSP
OUT FL
OUT RL
OUT FR
OUT RR
CD.L
CD.R
BCK
LRCK
REST,SW1,SW2
VREF
SDO
DACML
DACMC
DACMD
DET OUT
J801
RFGC
RF,FE,TE
RFRP
SEL,TEB
RFDC
IC361
IC381
LINE AMP
RL
RR
CN951
SPINDLE+
SPINDLE-
IC572
CD LPF
IC571
24bit DAC
RWSEL,IOP
CD.L-CH
CD.R-CH
CN702
IC601
CD RF
TU1
FM/AM
TUNER
J321
FRONT
LINE OUT
REAR
LINE OUT
FL
FR
TU.L
TU.R
CN952
CN601
LOAD/FEED+
LOAD/FEED-
CN802
PICK UP
VOUTL
VOUTR
REST
LOAD/FEED
MOTOR
J1
ANT
SCK
CN501
REST
SWITCH
SPINDLE
MOTOR
VA,VB
VE,VF
MD,LD
VREF
SW1
SW2
SW1
SW2
IC573
X571
CLOCK GEN.
EFD-IN1
EFD-IN2
EFD-IN3
2-1
Standard schematic diagrams
Main amplifier section
CN141
J321
QGA2006C1-04
QNN0490-001
TU1
FL
R331
820
R332
180
RL
R351
820
R352
180
FR
R321
820
RR
R341
820
QAU0203-002
0.047
2.2/50
C231
C232
2.2/50
0.0027
C210
0.0018
C230
0.0018
C209
0.0068
C229
0.0068
C212
C211
Q331
KTD1304-X
Q351
KTD1304-X
Q341
KTD1304-X
Q321
KTD1304-X
IC271
Q271
UN2211-X
CD4066BPW-X
LPF2
0.0027
C71
2.2/50
R166
10K
R186
10K
R785
47K
R726
47K
C702
0.01
100/10
C908
R902
0.01
10/16
22/16
C905
220/10
C907
47K
C902
C906
0.1
C904
PON
0.01
C903
R901
C851
0.1
D852
RB160M-30-X
R851
4.7K
CH.L
10
10
R924
10
R922
R923
10
R921
SCK
CH.R
BUSINT
BUSCLK
SI/SO
C321
100P
0.047
C262
R323
10K
100P
D321
MA111-X
C261
R353
10K
R343
10K
D351
MA111-X
R333
10K
IC251
NJM4565M-WE
D331
MA111-X
D341
MA111-X
R257
100K
2.2/50
C252
C981
100P
MA8062/M/-X
1K
R310
Q251
2SD601A/QR/-X
C305
0.1
C315
0.1
4.7/25
27K
R309
C308
100P
R303
R313
C303
C313
47K
100P
100P
EFD-IN2
2.2K
R853
C316
0.1
4.7/25
C307
QQR1378-002
FR+
RL+
FL+
RR+
RL-
FL-
FR-
C802
0.047
R809
22K
R808
100
J801
QNZ0095-001
BUZZER
Q841
UN2211-X
C852
0.1
220/10
R807
330
100
NJM2360AM-X
R803
IC921
D921
RB160M-30-X
R926
C923
0.047
27K
R927
47K
4.7K
R928
47K
3.3K
VR921
47K
C924
2700P
100K
R804
QJB005-040909
EFD-IN3
150u
R802
C306
0.1
C304
C314
R307
10K
EFD-IN1
180
C922
100/16
22K
L922
R801
2.2K
R852
CN952
DIM
R925
C921
R805
R841
R881
100K
4.7U
R806
100K
IC801
C706
C716
22P
C715
27P
C714
27P
C713
8P
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
ANT
PS2
1K
R906
47K
Q902
UN2211-X
L921
47K
R810
47K
X702
QAX0401-001
47K
R703
X701
QAX0617-001Z
220/10
C708
0.1
0.01
C707
C718
IC702
IC-PST3433U-X
Q901
2SB624/4/-X
C910
0.47
R713
R704
10M
2.2/50
C978
R979
9.1K
C955
56P
C951
220/10
R976
6.8K
R977
18K
L702
47u
C801
0.047
D701
MA111-X
R706
2.2K
L961
C881
22/16
R951
1K
C953
0.01
3.3K
0.1
C895
R891
47K
R895
MA111-X
R716
KEY
1K
2.2K
R715
1K
1K
R712
R709
D901
Q977
2SB709A/QR/-X
X1
47/6.3
C717
SML-310LT/MN/-X
MA8062/M/-X
D710
R787
560
R786
560
D712
D713
MA8062/M/-X
D709
MA8062/M/-X
D708
MA8062/M/-X
D707
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
D706
D705
D704
D703
MA8062/M/-X
KEYDATA
MA8062/M/-X
DETACH
SML-310LT/MN/-X
DETACH
SML-310LT/MN/-X
DISPCE
DETACH
D711
DISPCE
KEYDATA
47K
DISPCK
DISPDA
DISPDATA
14V
HD74HC126FP-X
R707
47K
DISPSCK
DISPDATA
R714
1K
10K
820
1K
100
L701
47u
PS2
R746
DISPCE
RESET
LEVEL
C704
0.01
10V
47K
1/50
2.2K
R724
C841
R710
10V
4.7K
BZ841
QAN0023-001Z
PS2
DISPSCK
4.7K
R719
100/6.3
SBD
SBD
10K
R720
D851
RB160M-30-X
D781
MA111-X
RDSSCK
PS2
1K MRC
R721
100P
C711
R762
1K
R763
SBT
R722
C712
Q702
UN2214-X
ACC5V
PS2
LEVEL
LEVEL
R883
47K
R892
47K
C891
0.1
C703
470P
R711
47K
CDREQ
ACC5V
SBT
D922
MA111-X
BUSINT
15V
R708
15V
R705
ACC5V
VDD5V
ANT
SBRST
R701
VDD5V
SQ
UPD784217AGC268
TEL-M
VDD5V
SM
1K
IC701
D714
MA111-X
6.8K
R738
R764
1K
6.8K
R734
6.8K
R736
QGF1041C1-16W
CN701
GND
REMOCON
SBRST
D702
To CN801
(SHEET 3)
D715
MA111-X
GND
1K
R723
R799
47K
R702
R718
22K
R717
47K
VDD
REMOCON
R798
1K
AMPSW
R725
QGA2501F1-02
QMFZ047-150-T
BUSSO
R980
4.7K
1K
R905
47K
R727
CN951
RD
MUTE
R904
10K
BUSCLK
1K
BUSI/O
1K
R903
DISPDA
1K
R729
5.6K
1K
R731
1K
22/16
R732
1K
R792
CN901
QNZ0650-001
C909
1K
R791
LPF2
R983
2.2K
IC901
Q782
UN2111-X
3.9K
R780
LPF1
SI/SO
KEY
Q951
UN2211-X
AN80T07A
Q976
UN2213-X
47K
R733
SUBM
D993
RB160M-30-X
D991
RB160M-30-X
D997
RB160M-30-X
D995
RB160M-30-X
R978
RB160M-30-X
TD
C993
100P
C991
100P
C997
100P
C995
100P
2.2K
270
D902
MA111-X
47K
R796
Q895
UN2211-X
D951
UDZS3.9B-X
KICK
UDZS11B-X
DISPCK
C783
100/16
DISPCE
D994
RB160M-30-X
D992
RB160M-30-X
D998
RB160M-30-X
D996
RB160M-30-X
C994
100P
C992
100P
C998
100P
C996
100P
D853
RB160M-30-X
C952
0.01
D782
BUZZER
3.9K
0.22
3.9K
R735
EFD-OUT2
TEL-M
C781
R737
1K
TEL
Q781
UN2111-X
1K
R777
C782
100/6.3
10K
R776
VOLCK
C901
220/10
Q703
UN2211-X
C722
0.01
Q705
UN2211-X
Q704
UN2213-X
C721
0.01
C720
0.01
R739
VOLDA
R882
4.7K
IC951
D854
220/10
R795
C961
3300/16
D961
R384
33K
C705
0.047
C710
47K
47K
C386
0.0015
R382
22K
BA6956AN
PS
EQCLK
EFD-OUT1
EFD-OUT2
R742
270
1/50
R306
0
R893
1K
10K
0.047
R794
R312
27K
Q881
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q891
UN2211-X
R741
D891
MA111-X
DETACH
D892
MA111-X
KICK
1K
BUSSO
47K
C310
C312
0.47
C962
0.1
R982
22K
0
R745
0.022
RR-
EQCLK
BR24L32F-W-X
R747
C701
220/10
R779
R793
RL-
C302
0.47
R302
C390
1/50
C388
EFD-OUT1
1K
MUTE
47K
47K
C320
27K
C382
4.7/25
BUSI/O
47K
R304
R386
C389
1/50
C391
47/16
10K
47K
R775
C318
FL-
RL+
C387
100/10
C381
4.7/25
100/16
22/16
FL+
D301
MA111-X
C385
0.0015
0
0
2.2K
R750
R748
R749
EFD-IN1
EQLA
EFD-IN2
10K
EQDATA
2.2K
R751
EFD-IN3
10K
330
R797
10K
QAL0536-001
C319
0.022
Q301
UN2211-X
R383
33K
R314
NJM2160AV-X
ILL
VPP
QNZ0664-001
FR+
100/10
47K
47K
47K
IC703
C719
0.01
R774
C709
0.1
VSS
47K
47K
IC381
22K
EQLA
EQDATA
VOLMUTE
VOLCK
VOLDA
LEVEL
R752
R753
R754
R755
2.2K
10K
RDSDA
1K
R756
AFCK
1K
R757
SD/ST
1K
R758
CF
FM/AM
SEEK
1K
1K
1K
PLLCE
2.2K
PLLDA
PLLCK
RA701
R759
R766
R761
1K
1K
R767
R760
1K
R768
R790
R789
R788
R740
Q701
UN2211-X
FR-
1N5404-TU-15
CD8V
R772
R366
R381
0.1
R387
R242
47K
R244
22K
C244
22/16
C383
C372
SCK
VOLMUTE R771
R367
R364
33K
R246
390
D242
MA111-X
R247
1K
R177
100K
SI/SO
47K
47K
R362
22K
0.1
R11
10K
DIM
TEL
10K
R769
PLLDI
PON
ILL
0
R770
Q706
UN2211-X
R778
RR-
RR+
C317
C366
0.0015
C364
47K
R241
120K
R198
100K
0.22/50
R248
270K
C245
R74
100
X71
QAX0263-001Z
82P
C77
C75
R243
180K
1K
R73
R72
0.01
47/6.3
C74
C76
47P
AFCK
0.1
C55
SEEK
SD/ST
R57
39K
C53
C242
1/50
AMPSW
PS
C301
0.47
LA47515
0
1/50
C309
100P
27K
R301
27K
C370
1/50
C368
R305
1K
Q302
2SD601A/QR/-X
C371
47/16
R308
C311
0.47
R311
C362
4.7/25
CD.R
PON
100/6.3
R255
10K
D982
C369
1/50
0.1
R773
FL
FR
C367
100/10
C384
L703
47u
R981
0
47K
R188
1K
RL
10K
R169
R171
R170
C241
C365
0.0015
RR
2.2K
2.2K
0.0047
100/10
C169
C168
C167
47/16
R245
12K
IC301
33K
IC361
NJM2160AV-X
C361
4.7/25
R168
1K
CD.L
0
R256
10K
1M
C253
CN981
12K
12K
47K
47K
C243
0.047
2.2/50
IC71
SAA6579T-X
R187
1K
CN702
0
R251
100K
R274
1M
C255
MA111-X
MA111-X
22K
R197
100K
Q241
2SD601A/QR/-X
QGB2027M4-22S
R730
D251
R363
C363
0.1
R178
100K
R728
R263
4.7K
MA111-X
D252
100/10
CDREQ
CN251
QGA2501C1-03
D981
GND
RDSSCK
Q707
UN2211-X
180
R262
180
C260
0.1
R167
1K
R800
47K
C251
R261
820
Q252
UN2111-X
C166
10/16
9V
To CN501
(SHEET 2)
47/16
0.0082
0.01
R260
47K
10/16
C276
0.01
C216
0.01
MA111-X
C259
47/6.3
C258
0.047
R275
D253
C221
2.2/50
C215
SUBM
R164
R184
R165
R185
R61
0
2.2K
Q52
2SD601A/QR/-X
0.082
C222
4.7/25
R252
47K
2.2/50
C213
R253
100K
0.082
C201
R254
0
47K
0.022
C72
C73
560P
C202
C271
Q272
UN2211-X
LPF1
180
R342
2.2/50
100/10
R58
47K
2.2K
0.1
1/50
C164
R56
47K
R54
10K
R55
0.027
C223
C272
0.0056
R322
C257
QGA2006F1-02
C54
0.01
0.0047
R53
10K
C224
0.1
1/50
C165
RDSDA
Q53
UN2211-X
C51
0.027
C203
C184
D241
MA111-X
0.47/50
0.1
C204
0.027
1/50
Q56
UN2111-X
C52
0.039
1/50
D5
R52
10K
SQ
C225
1M
0
R71
1K
MA111-X
Q51
2SD601A/QR/-X
0.039
0.027
C275
R272
0
1K
LIN.L
SM
R51
470
C205
C274
R361
Q54
2SD601A/QR/-X
R12
39K
0.012
1M
CH.R R183
0.1/50
C9
D3
D4
R10
3.3K
FM/AM
0.015
C226
R271
1K
R3
10
MA111-X
MA111-X
R7
47K
R8
4.7K
R59
4.7K
Q7
UN2211-X
0.0047
C227
0.012
R259
15K
C256
0.082
R273
47K
CD.L R162
CD.R R182
CH.L R163
LIN.G
Q57
UN2111-X
C228
0.015
C206
R276
C93
R92
C161
1/50
C181
1/50
C162
1/50
C182
1/50
C163
1/50
C183
R1
47K
Q55
UN2111-X
0.0047
C207
0.033
R258
5.6K
47K
LIN.R
820P
27K
820P
C83
Q91
R93
R83
TU.L
TU.R
LIN.R
Q6
2SB624/4/-X
C208
C273
TDA7404D-X
4.7K
C11
100/10
Q81
2SD601A/QR/-X
IC161
2SD601A/QR/-X
27K
R82
10K
4.7K
C7
0.047
LIN.G
LIN.L
MRC
PLLDI
PLLCK
10K
R91
C6
100/10
C10
0.015
R81
0.015
C92
C82
56P
100/10
C5
47/10
0.01
47/10
B5
C4
C3
C2
MA111-X
D2
R4
39K
C8
22
330P
22
R6
C81 4.7/25
C91 4.7/25
R2
27
Q5
2SB624/4/-X
R9
47K
R5
D1
C1
0.047
MA111-X
CF
L1
4.7u
PLLCE
QAM0556-001
PLLDA
J1
C322
C151
0.0047
R142
470
C141
0.0047
C214
C142
0.47
R151
47K
0.047
IC201
M62449FP-X
R141
47K
SHEET 1
2-2
DACML
DACMC
DACMD
CDON
C578
R589
CD.L-CH
10k
10k
47/6.3
R591
R590
10k
C591
C592
47k
47/6.3
R592
R587
47k
IC572
NJM4565V-X
820p
R588
C583
820p
100p
100p
C584
C581
C582
R574 47
IC571
PCM1748KE-X
47
R668
4.7/35
10k
C588
12k
R586
120p
C590
30k
CD.R-CH
4.7/35
Q571
C599
-
R584
C593
C586
4.7/35
47u
L572
UN2111-X
Q572
4.7
0.047
R593
C594
0.1
100p
C659
C660
0.01
100p
C661
C663
1000p
C598
10/6.3
C662
1000p
CDON
UN2211-X
100p
C595
0.1
47/6.3
C574
47/6.3
C573
0.1
C575
1K
C576
BCK
SDO
LRCK
20k
47/16
1K
C572
C571
27P
47k
2.2k
0.01
LD
C589
120p
C596
0.0068
C587
12k
4.7/35
1000p
820
30k
R583
Q574
UN2211-X
C597
10k
R608
C605
20k
R582
47u
TE
82k
R607
SEL
2SB1132/QR/-W
Q601
C604
22
22
R606
0.01
100/6.3
R616
R579
RFDC
R578
IOP
R605
C603
C601
0.01
0.01
47/6.3
C602
IC652
TC94A34FG-002
0.01
C666
100p
R678
X651
C676
0.01
47
R654
C655
0.01
MP3STB
MP3DA
MP3CK
8VDET
47k
R526
R524
R534
R533
R532
R531
R530
R528
R529
R527
UN2111-X
R540
C513
C694
R542
R543
R544
R545
MP3DA
MP3CK
C686
100
10k
100
100
10k
L502
0.1
47u
D506
MA111-X
B501
0
100k
R561
1k
R568
BUSSO
R563
R562
6.8k
C551 0.01
3.9k
CD.L-CH
AGND
Q502
UN2211-X
0.01
100
1k
R553
BUSSCK
R556
18k
To CN702
(SHEET 1)
0
100k
R558
100k
100k
R552
R551
33k
R554
22P
C505
22P
C504
0.01
C506
DATE
CDMUTE
CDREQ
CDRESET
B.DET
P.DET
BUSSI/SO
BUSCLK
1k
R570
100
CD8V
RESET
47k
CN501
QGB2027L1-22X
R508
C503
100/6.3
0.01
C502
BUSSO
BUSSI
BUSSCK
SCK R598
R507
47k
R506
47k
DATA R599
IC502
BR24L01AFV-W-X
BOOT
C683
SW2
REST
0.01
1k
1k
1k
100
100
C510
Q681
2SB1184/QR/-X
C501
R501
R502
CDREQ R503
CDMUTE
R504
MP3RST
R505
MP3STB
8.2k
15k
R691
R565
R566
CDON
4.7/35
0
B682
10/6.3
C682
0.1
C684
BUSIO
/BUSIO
C690
CD.R-CH
9V
SCK
R564
R569
NAX0385-001X
X501
R510
VREF
DMO
LOAD
LD/FE
R684
6.8k
R686 TRO
12k
R688 FOO
1.8k
47k
47k
1k CDRESET
R509
R512
R511
CDON
6.8k
R687
6.8k
B.DET
47k
BUSSCK
R683
BUSSCK
BOOT
BUSSI
BUSSO
IOP
0.01
12k
R685
47k
R514
1k
NAD0028-103X
6.8k
RESET
R513
R549 4.7k
R550 4.7k
R548 8.2k
R525
100k
TH501
33k
R689
C509
R690
2.2k
R681
270
270
R682
R546
R547
CN502
QGF0501F1-08X
SW1
R515
R555
CDON
IC503
SN74AHCT126PW-X
BUSSI
100k
47k
C693
47/16
FOCUS+
FOCUSTRACKING+
TRACKING-
0.01
C511
0
R539
C689
47/16
100 DSPRST
100
CCE
100
BUCK
100
BUS0
100
BUS1
100
BUS2
100
BUS3
R523
R522
R521
R520
R519
R518
R517
47/16
R559
47k
0.01
NJU7241F33-X
IC504
100
C508
R541
C685
DATA
BCK
LRCK
47k
R656
BUSIO
/BUSIO
LOAD
LD/FE
RWSEL
100
100
1k
47k
47k
47k
R537
R536
R535
C512
100/6.3
TMP91CW12AF5GJ4
R557
C688
C507
0.01
R560
C687
CDON
SDO
DACMD
DACMC
DACML
100
100
100
0.001
C514
P.DET
1SR154-400-X
D682
FMO
IC681
BA5830FP-X
IC501
R516
0
B681
Q501
1k
SPINDLE+
SPINDLELOAD/FEED+
LOAD/FEED-
47u
47/6.3
47u
C622
L621
47
C621 0.01
DATA
47
R623
LRCK
47
R622
C645
BCK
47/6.3
C644
5.6k
R621
0.01
0.33
C646
L501
R624
8VDET
R638
R639
R640
R641
R642
47u
47u
2SB624/4/-X
47k
R625
L623
0.01
C651
470k
0.015
R626
L651
15k
1.5M
R627 C624
47p
C623
4.7k
4.7k
4.7k
4.7k
10k
R628
C654
Q651
0.01
C625
IC621
TC94A14FA
R651
100k
Q652
UN2211-X
0.1
MP3RST
C626
47/6.3
C669
47/6.3
C652
BUS0
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUCK
CCE
DSPRST
RF
0.0027
IC651
C628
10k
C627 0.01
2200P
47/6.3
10k
0.1
R655
C656
R657
2.2k
C629
R629
C664
C668
47u
0.01
220
L653
RFDC
FE
RFRP
0.033
C643
LOAD/FEED+
LOAD/FEED-
R675
NJU7772F15-X
TE
47u
0.033
C630
L652
C665
0.1
R677
C675
47/6.3
0.047
C633
C667
C653
0.047
C634
SEL
TEB
RFGC
100
100
R630
R631
R636
R635
1M
R637
0
0
0
R634
R633
R632
47u
FOCUSFOCUS+
TRACKING+
TRACKINGSPINDLE+
SPINDLEREST
SW2
SW1
0.047
0.047
470p
470p
0.047
FOO
C637
C636
C632
C631
C635
L622
150
0.01
C639
0.01
C640
C638
47/6.3
C641
R615
MD
LD
100p
0.01
C642
C614
VE
VREF
VB
100
100
VF
VREF
TRO
DMO
FMO
VA
47/6.3
CN601
QGF0527F2-22W
C612
C613
82k
82k
330k
330k
TEB
R601
R602
R603
R604
VB
VA
VF
VE
MD
C585
R581
L571
R576
R572
2.2M
Q573
2SB624/4/-X
R573
27P
X571
1K
NAX0375-001X
R575
R577
L573
IC601
TA2157FN-X
IC573
SN74AHCU04PW-X
56k
0.1
R609
5p
C608
10k
100
C610
0.1
2k
C577
R611 R610
C609
15k
47/6.3
C616
10/6.3
C607
0.01
FE
C606
47/6.3
RWSEL
RFRP
R585
0.1
C611
100
68p R613
1k
R614
R612
RF
RFGC
CD servo control section
47/16
SHEET 2
2-3
C817
C814
C831
0.1/35
C834
1/16
A0
A1
A2
A3
2-4
C832
30p
IC801
R807
C833
30p
47k
MN102H60KCN1
PSAVE2
R840
100
X801
NAX0652-001X
47k
220K
Q480
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q803
2SD601A/QR/-X
47k
R892
470k
D801
MA152WK-X
KEYIN
JS801
PS2
R878
L801
47u
TRIMLED
QSW0976-001
R899
R877
0
470
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
D806
D805
D807
IC805
GP1UM261XK
D804
S612
MA8062/M/-X
S613
D808
S614
S618
NSW0124-001X
S615
LED6
S616
LED5
EXROM
C829
4.7/6.3
300
R610
LED4
270
R611
REM
390
R612
D812
MA8062/M/-X
560
R613
LED3
KEY2
820
R614
Q406
UN2211-X
Q405
UN2211-X
Q404
UN2211-X
Q403
UN2211-X
Q402
UN2211-X
Q401
UN2211-X
Q400
UN2211-X
ANA
820
S606
R409
S607
VOL1
S608
LED2
S609
1k
1k
100k
1K
1K
R825 100k
R824 100k
R817
1K
R828
R827
R826
R819
R818
RA810
10K
R839 1k
R838 1k
R837 10k
R836 10k
R835 10k
TH801
NAD0028-103X
D402
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D404
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D408
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D410
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D413
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D411
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D415
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D418
SML-310LT/MN/-X
680
R403
R402
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
D811
D809
1k
1.2k
1k
R404
R401
820
1.2k
R405
820
R406
680
R407
680
R408
680
R413
680
R414
680
R415
680
R416
680
R417
680
R418
R429
680
680
R430
680
680
R419
680
R420
R421
820
R422
820
820
R423
820
R425
R424
470
R426
470
R427
R428
CL2
CL1
WR
LED3
VOL2
VOL1
CL3
CS
RS
KEY2
KEY1
KEY0
SBT
SBD
KEYDA
DISPDA
DISPCK
LED2
LED1
LED0
D810
D401
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D400
MA152WK-X
D403
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D407
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D409
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D412
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D416
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D414
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D417
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D419
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D420
SML-310LT/MN/-X
D422
CL-190UB2-X-X
D421
CL-190UB2-X-X
KEY1
LED1
300
R605
LED0
270
R606
VOL2
Q802
2SB709A/QR/-X
R869
R870
S617
470k
390
R607
820
RA801
330
560
R608
D405
SML-A12BC2T-X
Q407
2SD601A/QR/-X
RA805
1K
820
R609
D406
SML-A12BC2T-X
R410
RA802
330
1.5K
S610
47k
C804
470p
R616
S611
S601
820
RA806
1K
S602
820
RA803
330
S603
KEY0
R411
RA807
330
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
C805
470P
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
300
R601
R412
RA804
330
270
R602
S604
R872
R822 1k
390
R603
C828
10/6.3
RA808
330
S600
560
R604
C826
10/6.3
0.047
OSC
RD
S605
IC804
NJU7241F33-X
R823 1K
R816 1K
R821 8.2k
C827
0.047
330
C806
0.047
R874
R890
10k
R891
0R0
PSAVE2 C835
0.1
C637 R847
KEYIN
0.047
R806
47k
47k
C810
RST
47k
47k
4.7/6.3
4.7/6.3
4.7/6.3
100k
MA8062/M/-X
D423
Q408
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q409
2SD601A/QR/-X
D424
MA8062/M/-X
T2-1
T2-2
T2-3
T2-4
T2-8
T2-9
T2-10
R830
R829
C809
C808
C807
C825
390
390
390
D425
MA8062/M/-X
T1-1
T1-2
T1-3
T1-4
T1-8
T1-9
T1-10
47k
47k
1.5k
1.5k
1.5k
10/6.3
0.047
10/6.3
Q804
UN2111-X
C802
C801
330
330
47K
RA809
330
R804
R803
R896
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
TRIMLED
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
1K
330
330
330
CL1
R431
R432
R433
Q410
2SD601A/QR/-X
560
Q411
2SD601A/QR/-X
R846
DISPCE
CS1
IC-PST3424U-X
R479
R801
R895
R897
RST
R434
CL2
560
560
R3
G3
B3
R845
R844
R843
R842
R841
RES
RE
MA111-X
R865
47k
R435
R436
CL3
Q413
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q412
2SD601A/QR/-X
390
390
390
D429
MA8062/M/-X
Q420
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q421
2SD601A/QR/-X
B3
D430
MA8062/M/-X
Q422
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q423
2SD601A/QR/-X
G3
R3
D431
MA8062/M/-X
Q424
2SD601A/QR/-X
Q425
2SD601A/QR/-X
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
ROMCONT
D803
IC803
C811
D802
MA111-X
0.047
4.7/6.3
R866
2.2k
R437
R438
R439
390
390
390
560
560
560
390
0.047
0.047
0.047
0.047
0.047
0.047
C459
C458
C457
C453
C452
C451
D453 NSCM315C-W
SBRST
0.47
IC802
LH28F160BJHET95
CL1
R449
R450
R451
CL2
R452
R453
R454
CL3
R455
390
390
0.047
C812
C813
0.47
10/6.3
C816
0.47
C815
A17
D7
A0
EXROM
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
C636
0.047
D6
D5
ROMCNT
RST
RES
CS
RS
WR
RD
D4
D3
D2
R457
OSC
R456
R867
D1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A18
A19
2.2M
RE
D0
A1
CS1
0
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
47k
0.047
0.047
0.047
0.047
0.047
R873
QGF0523F1-40W
CN802
C818
R898
C820
C821
C822
C823
C824
C819
0.047
LCD & Key control section
D451 NSCM315C-W
REM
CN801
NNZ0098-001X
SBRST
VDD5V
ACC5V
15V
SBT
ANA
PS2
SBD
DISPSCK
To CN701
(SHEET 1)
DISPCE
DISPDA
KEYDA
10V
Q801
2SB709A/QR/-X
R868
0.047
SHEET 3
Printed circuit boards
Main board
Main board
Forward side
L1
C262
R313
C242
C245
R306
C306
C320
R799
R164
R709
R162
C368
B901
C362
L701
C782
C783
CN981
R178
R387
IC301
C390
C384
C386
C385
C387
R800
L703
R381
B704
R739
C391
R841
R730
C708
C922
B703
C719
C717
L921
L702
C712
C711
R177
R386
C388
C921
R708
R926
C923
C381
C389
R384
R382
CN702
R715
R982
R707
D701
D781
C382
R383
C383
C981
D982
IC901
D782
C718
R785
R724
C707
C710
Q702
B302
C906
Q977
R712
R713
R981
R742
R740
D922
C905
C902
C702
D981
R718
C907
C901
C781
R741
R790
R789
R788
R710
C851
C372
X701
CN952
VDD
X1
X702
R764
C714
C713
C716
C715
PP3
C908
C366
R976
R977
R198
C701
R702
R717
Q701
RD VPP
C371
R367
R188
D901
C706
R747
Q902
R363
R362
R364
C369
C370
C909
R361
R366
R182
C162
R778
R750
R751
R752
C952
C841
Q841
BZ841
TD
RESET
B702
Q951
C316
C315
C961
R732
R731
C241
R757
R758
R759
R951
D951
B301
C214
X71
R780
CN951
B951
B952
D708
D710
D706
D707
D702
D703
D704
D709
D705
CN701
C305
R170
R9
R165
B101
R332
R331
R341
R342
R352
R351
R321
R322
R722
R723
R793
R795
R729
R798
C182
C244
IC951
C951
C367
R197
C361
R797
C953
R925 R927
R924
R923 VR921
R922
R921
R786
R787
D713
D711
D712
PP4
PP2
R928
C924
R142
PP6
R185
R183
C258
R82
R61
R725
C73
C74
CN951
CN952
PP3
C319
C168
R187
R774
C709
R792
C76
R72
C77
C951
R736
R734
R738
L702
IC921
C921
R171
Q341
R8 Q6
R93
R83
R92
C93
B2
R254
R257
D253
X71
B4
R749
R748
R746
C710
L921
Q706
Q704
R728
C721
D921
C922
C841
C309
C212
C213
D715
IC703
IC702
C717
BZ841
D351
D321
Q351
Q321
R323
Q331
C204
C203
C202
C211
C210
C209
C208
C207
C206
C205
R777
R776
R775
R779
R796
R794
C706
L703
C391
R59
C9
IC951
C704
L922
Q707
Q703
Q705
R763
C707
R180 R168
IC381
C388
C720 C722
R179
C387
R719
R720
R721
R706
C705
C381
C317
C311
C169
C216
R714
R745
X702
CN981
CN702
R704
R705
C390
C308
C232
Q55
C75
R760
R756
R755
R754
R753
R716
L701
C389
D714
R901
C382
R167
R169
C181
C161
C221
B3
PP2
R703
C314
C313
C301
C978
B102
C215
C75
R761
B701
C11
Q271
R71
R73
RA701
R727
C783
C904
C903
D902
D903
C723
R769
R768
R766
X701
R711
R762
Q782
Q781
C782
IC701
R701
C701
PP5
C71
R735
R733
R737
C372
R726
Q976
R773
R772
R771
C703
C901
C902
R980 R979
R801
R802
R242
C895
Q895
C244
C245
C302
R791
R767
R895
R190
C364
IC901
C162
C71
R304
R166
Q251
R263
Q272
C201
C201
R770
C242
C362
C368
PP4
C307
R186
R303
C51
R60
C72
R314
C881
C166
C10
C9
IC801
Q56
R12
R4
C8
IC71
C212
R248
C905
C51
C55
R11
C310
C312
C167
C252
Q91
Q53 C6
R51
CN901
C184
C318
C253
R91
Q57
C52
R54
R58
C54
C241
C370
C907
C91
Q51
C165
C259
B5
C182
R241
IC361
R189
C910
C371
Q52
IC201
R81
R2
R151
R3
C81
B1
C213
C369
C908
C7
C92
C6
R163
C163
C802
C183
C257
C255
R1
R52
C11
R53
R55
C53
R809
R805
R247
R245 R244
R243
C5
C81
C801
D241
C361
Q901
C168
R246
C367
C243
D242 Q241
C251
R252
C216
R808
R810
R804
R803
C909
C365
PP5
R256
R255
R6
R74
C221
C961
C252
R253
IC161
C311
C5
R141
R312
C82
C91
C232
R902
R904
R903
D4
Q81
R56
R57
C308
C309
Q5
R5
C253
Q7
C272
R251
C4
D961
C151
C164
IC251
R276
Q252
C321
C322
D3
R7
IC271
C231
C230
C229
C228
C227
C226
C225
C224
C223
C222
R309
R308
Q302
R311
IC301
R305
C992
C991
C994
C993
C995
C996
C997
C998
R310
D992
D991
D994
D993
D995
D996
D997
D998
C161
C181
C3
R343
C83
R274
C273
C274
R275
C275
C276
C301
C260
R301
C978
C363
R353
C302
C317
R853 R852 C852
C257
C142
C141
C2
C962
D5
C259
PP1
J801
R10
C166
C318
D252
D251
C304
C303
C881
Q301
R271
D1
D341
C4
R258
R261
R273
R272
C255
C167
CN141
Q54
R302
R882
J321
D2
C1
C256
R259
R851
D301
D891
R307
D852
C183
R262
C312
C307
J801
C163
C164
R891 D892
Q891
R892
R883
R893
Q881
R881
D853
C310
C165
C891
D851
D331
CN141
C184
D854
R333 PP6
D961
R260
C271
L961
R983
R978
CN901
C3
R807
R806
PP1
TU1
J321
C261
TU1
J1
L961
J1
R184
L1
CN251
CN251
Reverse side
JP1
2-5
Front board
Front board
Forward side
D411
D416
R602
D412
D413
Q802 R870
Q804
R869
R821
R822
R847
Q420
D803
R865 R892
C821
R878
Q424
IC802
R890
IC801
TH801
C804
D406
Q422
Q423
SI/SO
BDET
DSEL
LRCK
SCK
RCH
R593
Q502
C539
C538
B501
D506
C512
IC503
R501
R568
R569
R570
IC502
C510
R563
R533
R534
IC501
R508
R546
R510
R547
C504
C505
R677
R555
R556
R557
R552
R598
R531
R553
R562
R554
R521
R522
Q501
R551 C508 C511 IC504
C594
R532
X501
C662
C661
C668
R558
R561
C551
C645
R599
C507
C693
L501
R549
CN502
R550
C509
C501
R525
C503
R542
R545
R656
R657
L651
R541
R514
C652
R509
R516
R515
R513
C514
BUCK
IC651
X651
L623
C506
R512
Q651
C653
R511
L652
CCE
R559
R560
L502
C575
IC571
R502
R503
R540
R548
R523
C502
2-6
C537
REQ
RESET
DATA
C586
C582
R581 C583
R582 C584
C581
L572
C656
C622
IC652
R518
R517
R519
R520
R651
C654
C651
C689
B681
C513
Q574
C630
BUS0
21
3
C647 C641
C690
C674
C694
Q572
C655
C639
R688
R684 R682
R683 R681
D682
D681
C593
CDMUTE
C585
C577
R574
R575
L653
C673
C572
C663
L621
C682 L622
Q571
L571
C578
R654
C628
C615
RWSEL
C601
C607
RF
FE
R577
Q573
IC621
R691
L573
C638
C640
R689
C681
Q681
C684
Q652
R637
C642
C646
C644
R642
R640
R641
C637
C636
C660
C659
R627
R624
R635
R636
C643
C664
R675
C675
C676
R686
R639
R638
R536
R537
R621
R622
R678
R535
R544
R543
R504
R505
C621
R623
R630
R631
C573
C574
R576
R668
C623
C624
VREF
R687 R685 R690
R632
R634
R633
C626
C665
R526
R528
R530
R507
R506
R527
R529
C632
C631
RFGC
C616
IC681
R629
R628
C625
C627
R625
R626
R655
C686
C683
C606
C687
C611
R613
R611
R610
R612
C610
C609
C685
IC573
C571 R573
C604
C688
C605
IC601
SEL
TEB
R609
R524
C669
C666
C667
R539
B571
X571
C612
C613
C603
C614
R604
R601
C602
R616
RFDC
C597
R592
C576
R578
R572
CN601
TE
R602
R603
R605
R606
BUSCK
PDET C536
C535
C598
Q601
R615
R590
9V
BCK
R591
TH501
R588
IC572
C591
R589
C592
C599
C589
R587
CN501
C590
LCH
C533
C521
C596
C595
VDD
C522
C523
C524
C525
C526
C527
C528
C529
C530
C531
C532
C534
C588
R584
R586
R827
R829
R830
R828
C636
C822
C823
C810
R410
R409
D804
D806
IC803
C835
R891
C801
C813
C811
R826
R816
R817
R818
R819
Q421
D425
C587
R583
R585
R579
C826
JS801
Q407
Reverse side
C608
L801
R823
D805
D810
D809
Forward side
R564
R566
R565
Q801
C825
Mecha control board
R614 R608
R607
C828
R807
D801
R898
R868
CN802
R872
R867
C824
C820
C817
C819
R874
T1-2
T1-4
C805
R873
C827
IC804
C831
R804
R479
R801
R895
R897
R803
R896
D807
Q404
Q480
C812
D811
R411
R412
R431
D405
D451
C451
C452
C453
Mecha control board
Q425
T1-1
T1-3
R877
R433
R432
D423
D424
D430
D431
D429
D410
S612
D409
R417
R418
IC805
R605
Q405
R875
R876
R612
D418
D417
D802
C809
C808
C807
D415
R603
R421
R422
R451
R450
R449
C634
C635
C633
C629
R423
R424
S601
R454
R453
R452
T1-9
S607
R420
D414
D419
R408
R407
R845
R844
S608
S609
S602
R457
R456
R455
T1-8
S603
S604
R439
R438
R437
S613
IC805
R608
R430
R429
D808
CN801
T1-10
R601
R436
R435
R434
Q406
Q403
R610
R607
R606
R836
R835
Q803
Q413 Q412
Q410
Q411 Q408
Q409
Q400
R419
S610
R604
D407
R866
C816
C818
C815
C814
C615
C459
C458
C457
Q402
R837
S605
D420
R843
RA809
R899
D408
RA805
RA804
RA801
R425
R426
D615
RA806
RA802
R427
Q401
R613
R825
R824
RA808
S606
D421
D422
R401
R402
R428
RA810
S614
D453
R616
RA803
S600
R413
R414
R415
R416
S615
RA807
R611
R609
R841
R405
R406
JS801
R842 C637
C806
R806
R846
R403
R404
S611
D404
RFRP
S617
D400
S618
D403
S616
R839
R838
D812
C829
D402
D401
C802
X801
R840
Reverse side
C834
R614
< MEMO >
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
AV & MULTIMEDIA COMPANY CAR ELECTRONICS CATEGORY 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan
(No.MA063SCH)
Printed in Japan
WPC
PARTS LIST
[ KD-LH401 ]
* All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts.
Area suffix
E ----------- Continental Europe
EX --------------- Central Europe
- Contents Exploded view of general assembly and parts list (Block No.M1)
CD mechanism assembly and parts list (Block No.MB)
Electrical parts list (Block No.01~03)
Packing materials and accessories parts list (Block No.M3)
MA063
3- 2
3- 5
3- 7
3-16
3-1
Exploded view of general assembly and parts list
Block No. M 1 M M
40
39
26
18
41
17
B
A
39
6
9
5
28
21
20
7
F
F'
36
11
10 14
C
16
E
D
16
G
G'
29
24
15
7
22
28
12
42
24
84
66
85
42
Mecha control board
66
42
44
79
100
65
Front board
44
48
67
78
53
69
55
51
50
68
54
77
62
59
73
52
49
76
60
58
64
75
47
63
57
70
46
56
80
61
83
72
71
3-2
74
1
1 M M
b
92
11
99 97
98
a
91
89
J
H
93
90
10 14
86
95
A
9
7
43
B
6
88
87
43
34
27
94
G
G'
15
8
34
96
H
b
12
J
a
Main board
32
c
31
32
2
c
3
66
1
G
13
F
65
30
25
77
74
13
35
38
19
D
38
C
E
F'
4
33
37
G'
35
23
81
30
45
82
3-3
General Assembly
Block No. [M][1][M][M]
 Symbol No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
3-4
Part No.
Part Name
GE20156-001A
FSYH4036-100
GE30968-001A
GE30964-001A
GE30975-001A
FSYH4036-100
GE40218-012A
GE30972-001A
GE30973-001A
GE40192-001A
GE40193-001A
WDL123525
WDL215025
GE40194-001A
GE40195-002A
GE40218-009A
GE10073-004A
GE40135-001A
GE10074-001A
GE10075-001A
GE40156-001A
GE40224-001A
GE30974-001A
GE40196-001A
GE31204-003A
GE31206-002A
GE40107-002A
QYSPSP2003M
QYSPSTU2040M
LV42181-002A
LV40865-001A
LV40865-001A
LV40865-001A
LV41200-001A
QYSDST2606Z
QYSDST2604Z
QYSDST2604Z
GE40231-001A
FSKZ4005-002
QYSDST2610Z
QYSDST2610Z
QYSDST2604Z
QYSDST2604Z
QYSDST2004Z
GE40218-011A
GE10082-007A
GE31177-004A
GE30832-002A
GE30856-001A
GE30859-001A
GE30834-001A
GE30836-001A
GE31200-003A
GE20152-001A
GE31172-003A
GE31174-003A
FSKW3002-012
GE30835-001A
FSYH4036-013
GE30937-002A
GE30858-003A
GE30860-001A
GE30861-002A
GE31173-001A
GE31203-006A
VKZ4777-001
GE40218-005A
GE40218-008A
LV43889-001A
GE40204-001A
GE31175-001A
GE40218-007A
GE30984-005A
LV33404-001A
GEAR BKT UNIT
SHEET
LEVER BKT UNIT
LOWER LEVER ASS
FRONT BKT ASSY
SHEET
SHEET
DETACH LEVER
KICK LEVER
SHAFT
SHAFT
SLIT WASHER
WASHER
T SPRING
T SPRING
SHEET
TOP CHASSIS
EARTH PLATE
BOTTOM CHASSIS
F CHASSIS
BLIND
MIRROR SHEET
FPC GUIDE
ABSORBER
INSULATOR
HEAT SINK
HEAT SINK
SCREW
TAP SCREW
SPECIAL SCREW
MINI SCREW
MINI SCREW
MINI SCREW
SPECIAL SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SHEET
FRONT PANEL
FINDER ASSY
POWER BUTTON
KNOB
SEL BUTTON
RIM LENS
RIM COVER(L)
RESET BUTTON
PRESET BUTTON
EQ BUTTON
DETACH BUTTON
COMP.SPRING
NAV BUTTON
SHEET
NAVI BASE
RIM COVER(R)
FM/AM BUTTON
EQ BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
R.COVER ASSY
MINI SCREW
SHEET
SHEET
SW PWB SHEET
JVC BADGE
LCD CASE
SHEET
LCD LENS
LIGHTING CASE
Description
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
2mm x 3mm(x2)
M2 x 4mm(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x3)
(x2)
2.6mm x 6mm(x2)
2.6mm x 4mm
2.6mm x 4mm
(x2)
(x2)
2.6mm x 10mm(x2)
2.6mm x 10mm
2.6mm x 4mm(x3)
2.6mm x 4mm(x2)
2mm x 4mm(x5)
(x4)
(x2)
Local
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
 91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
LV42884-001A
LV42995-002A
LV42955-002A
LV43084-001A
LV40848-034A
LV40846-036A
GE31169-001A
LV41843-002A
QLD0232-001
QUQ105-2207AE
VYSH101-009
QAM0547-001
QAM0464-002
VYTA500-001
QNZ0664-001
QAL0536-001
QMFZ047-150-T
GE31205-001A
GE40207-001A
GE40208-001A
QYSDSF2606Z
QYSDST2604Z
QYSDST2606Z
GE40214-001A
QYSDST2604Z
LV43920-001A
LCD FILTER
LCD FILTER
LENS SHEET
DOUBLE FACE
SPACER(P)
SPACER(F)
NAME PLATE
LASER CAUTION
LCD MODULE
FFC WIRE
SPACER
SUBWOOFER CABEL
STEERING REMOTE
PIN CAP
(x2)
CAR CONNECTOR
FPC
FUSE
15A
REAR BRACKET
POWER IC BKT
REG IC BKT
SCREW
2.6mm x 6mm
SCREW
2.6mm x 4mm
SCREW
2.6mm x 6mm
WIRE HOLDER
SCREW
2.6mm x 4mm
SPACER
Local
CD mechanism assembly and parts list
Grease
TNG-87
GP-501MK
CFD-005Z
GP-501A
Block No. M B M M
TN-2001-1013
111
34
74
2
72
35
26
33
31
111
111
73
C
36
85
37
15
22
29
116
25
A
19
112
23
38
B
114
61
13
27
21
24
30
11
62
A
112
32
75
D
99
76
28
38
115
83
12
D
C
95
B
93
32
96
122
100
20
90
121
87
14
97
82
89
100
94
86
18
98
83
16
125
17
124
101
123
88
a
4
92
113
91
94
111
81
84
1
93
73
74
75
77
3
71
a
111
3
111
3-5
CD mechanism
Block No. [M][B][M][M]
 Symbol No.
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
61
62
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
111
112
113
114
115
116
121
122
123
124
125
3-6
Part No.
Part Name
30320101T
30320102T
30320115T
30320116T
303205505T
303205503T
303205301T
303205302T
30320502T
30320503T
30320505T
30320506T
30320507T
30320509T
30320510T
30320511T
30320513T
30320514T
30320518T
30320519T
30320520T
30320521T
30320522T
30320525T
30320526T
30320538T
30320529T
30320530T
30320531T
30320523T
30320524T
30320539T
69011614T
64180406T
303210302T
30321002T
30321003T
30321005T
30321009T
30321011T
19501403T
303211301T
303211501T
303211302T
303211502T
303211303T
30321101T
30321102T
30321103T
30321104T
30321105T
30321106T
30321107T
30321111T
30321114T
30321116T
30321117T
30321118T
30321125T
30321131T
30321133T
18211223T
9P0420031T
9P0420041T
9B0320041T
9C0117183T
9C0120203T
9C0317503T
9W0130170T
9W0513060T
9W0710070T
9E0100152T
9W0113020T
FRAME
TOP COVER
DANPER F
DANPER R
CHASSIS RIVET
CHANGE P. RVT A
CLAMPER ASSY
SPINDLE MOTOR A
CLAMPER ARM
CHANGE GEAR SPG
CHANGE GEAR 2
FEED GEAR
FEED RACK
CHANGE LOCK RAR
FEED SW HOLDER
PU SHAFT HOLDER
CLAMPER SUB SPG
FD SUB HOLDER
TOP PLATE
SELECT LOCK ARM
TRIGGER ARM
SLIDE HOOK
PU SHAFT
CLAMPER ARM SPG
SELECT L ARM SP
SUSPENSION SP R
SELECT ARM R
LINK PLATE
LINK PLATE SPG
CUSHION F
CUSHION R
SUSPENSION SP L
PICKUP OPT-725
DET SW ESE22
CONN BOARD ASSY
MODE SW
LOAD MOTOR WIRE
MODE SW WIRE
SL WIRE
WIRE HOLDER
WIRE CLUMPER
ROLLER SHAFT AS
L GEAR PLATE RV
LOADING PLATE A
LOCK ARM RV ASS
L/F MOTOR ASSY
LOADING GEAR 1
LOADING GEAR 2
LOADING GEAR 3
LOADING GEAR 4
LOADING GEAR 5
LOADING GEAR 6
LOADING GEAR 7
ROLLER GUIDE
ROLLER GUIDE SP
DISC STOPPER AR
DISC ST ARM SPG
LD GEAR BRACKET
L SIDE PLATE
LOAD PLATE SPG
LDG ROLLER
COLLAR SCREW
SCREW
TAP.SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
PW 3.5X8X0.3
HL WASHER
L WASHER
E RING
PW 2.1X4X0.13
Description
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x2)
(x6)
(x2)
(x2)
Local
Electrical parts list
Main board
 Symbol No.
Block No. [0][1][0][0]
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
IC71
IC161
IC201
IC251
IC271
IC301
IC361
IC381
IC701
IC702
IC703
IC801
IC901
IC921
IC951
SAA6579T-X
TDA7404D-X
M62449FP-X
NJM4565M-WE
CD4066BPW-X
LA47515
NJM2160AV-X
NJM2160AV-X
UPD784217AGC268
IC-PST3433U-X
BR24L32F-W-X
HD74HC126FP-X
AN80T07A
NJM2360AM-X
BA6956AN
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
REGULATOR IC
IC
IC
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q51
Q52
Q53
Q54
Q55
Q56
Q81
Q91
Q241
Q251
Q252
Q271
Q272
Q301
Q321
Q331
Q341
Q351
Q701
Q702
Q703
Q704
Q705
Q706
Q707
Q781
Q782
Q841
Q881
Q891
Q901
Q902
Q951
Q976
Q977
2SB624/4/-X
2SB624/4/-X
UN2211-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
UN2211-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
UN2111-X
UN2111-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
UN2111-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
KTD1304-X
KTD1304-X
KTD1304-X
KTD1304-X
UN2211-X
UN2214-X
UN2211-X
UN2213-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2111-X
UN2111-X
UN2211-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
UN2211-X
2SB624/4/-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2213-X
2SB709A/QR/-X
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
DIGI TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
DIGI TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
D1
D2
D3
D4
D241
D242
D252
D253
D301
D321
D331
D341
D351
D701
D702
D703
D704
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Description
Local
Part No.
Part Name
D705
D706
D707
D708
D709
D710
D714
D715
D781
D782
D853
D854
D891
D892
D901
D902
D921
D922
D951
D961
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
UDZS11B-X
RB160M-30-X
RB160M-30-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
RB160M-30-X
MA111-X
UDZS3.9B-X
1N5404-TU-15
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
Z DIODE
SB DIODE
SB DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SB DIODE
SI DIODE
Z DIODE
DIODE
B5
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C76
C77
C81
C82
C91
C92
C161
C162
C163
C166
C167
C168
C169
C181
C182
C183
C201
C202
C203
C204
C205
C206
C207
C208
C209
C210
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
C216
C221
C222
C223
NDC31HJ-560X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31HK-103X
QERF1AM-476Z
QERF1AM-476Z
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1AM-107Z
NCB31EK-473X
NDC31HJ-331X
QERF1HM-104Z
QERF1HM-474Z
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31HK-472X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31CK-104X
QERF1HM-225Z
NCB31EK-223X
NDC31HJ-561X
NCB31HK-103X
QERF0JM-476Z
NDC31HJ-470X
NDC31HJ-820X
QERF1EM-475Z
NCB31EK-153X
QERF1EM-475Z
NCB31EK-153X
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1CM-106Z
QERF1CM-476Z
QERF1AM-107Z
NCB31HK-472X
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-225Z
NCB31CK-823X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31EK-273X
NCB31CK-393X
NCB31HK-123X
NCB31HK-153X
NCB31HK-472X
NCB31HK-682X
NCB31HK-182X
NCB31HK-272X
QERF1HM-225Z
QERF1EM-475Z
NCB31CK-473X
NCB31CK-473X
QERF1CM-106Z
QERF1HM-225Z
NCB31CK-823X
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
Description
Local
56pF 50V J
0.047uF 25V K
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 10V M
47uF 10V M
100uF 10V M
100uF 10V M
0.047uF 25V K
330pF 50V J
0.1uF 50V M
0.47uF 50V M
0.1uF 16V K
4700pF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.1uF 16V K
2.2uF 50V M
0.022uF 25V K
560pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
47pF 50V J
82pF 50V J
4.7uF 25V M
0.015uF 25V K
4.7uF 25V M
0.015uF 25V K
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
10uF 16V M
47uF 16V M
100uF 10V M
4700pF 50V K
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
2.2uF 50V M
0.082uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
0.027uF 25V K
0.039uF 16V K
0.012uF 50V K
0.015uF 50V K
4700pF 50V K
6800pF 50V K
1800pF 50V K
2700pF 50V K
2.2uF 50V M
4.7uF 25V M
0.047uF 16V K
0.047uF 16V K
10uF 16V M
2.2uF 50V M
0.082uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
3-7
 Symbol No.
C224
C225
C226
C227
C228
C229
C230
C231
C232
C241
C242
C243
C244
C245
C251
C252
C253
C255
C256
C257
C259
C261
C262
C271
C272
C273
C274
C275
C301
C302
C303
C304
C305
C306
C307
C308
C309
C310
C311
C312
C313
C314
C315
C316
C317
C318
C319
C320
C321
C322
C361
C362
C363
C364
C365
C366
C367
C368
C369
C370
C371
C372
C381
C382
C383
C384
C385
C386
C387
C388
C389
C390
C391
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
3-8
Part No.
Part Name
Description
NCB31EK-273X
NCB31CK-393X
NCB31HK-123X
NCB31HK-153X
NCB31HK-472X
NCB31HK-682X
NCB31HK-182X
NCB31HK-272X
QERF1HM-225Z
QERF1HM-225Z
QERF1HM-105Z
NCB31EK-473X
QERF1CM-226Z
QERF1HM-224Z
NCB31HK-822X
QERF1HM-225Z
QERF0JM-107Z
QERF1CM-476Z
NCB31EK-823X
QERF1HM-225Z
QERF0JM-476Z
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-103X
NCB31HK-562X
NCB31EK-333X
NCB31EK-273X
NCB31EK-273X
QFV61HJ-474Z
QFV61HJ-474Z
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31EK-104X
NCB31EK-104X
QERF1EM-475Z
QERF1EM-475Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QFV61HJ-474Z
QFV61HJ-474Z
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31EK-104X
NCB31EK-104X
QERF1CM-107Z
QERF1CM-226Z
NCB31EK-223X
NCB31EK-223X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31EK-473X
QERF1EM-475Z
QERF1EM-475Z
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31HK-152X
NCB31HK-152X
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1CM-476Z
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1EM-475Z
QERF1EM-475Z
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31HK-152X
NCB31HK-152X
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1HM-105Z
QERF1CM-476Z
QERF1AM-227Z
NCB31HK-103X
NDC31HJ-471X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31EK-473X
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
MF CAPACITOR
MF CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
MF CAPACITOR
MF CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
0.027uF 25V K
0.039uF 16V K
0.012uF 50V K
0.015uF 50V K
4700pF 50V K
6800pF 50V K
1800pF 50V K
2700pF 50V K
2.2uF 50V M
2.2uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
0.047uF 25V K
22uF 16V M
0.22uF 50V M
8200pF 50V K
2.2uF 50V M
100uF 6.3V M
47uF 16V M
0.082uF 25V K
2.2uF 50V M
47uF 6.3V M
100pF 50V J
0.047uF 25V K
0.01uF 25V K
5600pF 50V K
0.033uF 25V K
0.027uF 25V K
0.027uF 25V K
0.47uF 50V J
0.47uF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
0.1uF 25V K
0.1uF 25V K
4.7uF 25V M
4.7uF 25V M
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
0.47uF 50V J
0.47uF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
0.1uF 25V K
0.1uF 25V K
100uF 16V M
22uF 16V M
0.022uF 25V K
0.022uF 25V K
100pF 50V J
0.047uF 25V K
4.7uF 25V M
4.7uF 25V M
0.1uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
1500pF 50V K
1500pF 50V K
100uF 10V M
100uF 10V M
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
47uF 16V M
100uF 10V M
4.7uF 25V M
4.7uF 25V M
0.1uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
1500pF 50V K
1500pF 50V K
100uF 10V M
100uF 10V M
1uF 50V M
1uF 50V M
47uF 16V M
220uF 10V M
0.01uF 50V K
470pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
0.047uF 25V K
Local
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
C706
C707
C708
C709
C710
C711
C712
C713
C714
C715
C716
C717
C718
C719
C720
C721
C722
C781
C782
C783
C801
C802
C841
C852
C881
C891
C901
C902
C903
C904
C905
C906
C907
C908
C909
C910
C921
C922
C923
C924
C951
C955
C961
C962
C978
C991
C992
C993
C994
C995
C996
C997
C998
QERF0JM-107Z
QERF1AM-227Z
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31CK-104X
QERF1AM-227Z
NCB31EK-473X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-8R0X
NDC31HJ-270X
NDC31HJ-270X
NDC31HJ-220X
QERF0JM-476Z
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31CK-224X
QERF0JM-107Z
QERF1CM-107Z
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
QERF1HM-105Z
NCB31CK-104X
QERF1CM-226Z
NCB31EK-104X
QERF1AM-227Z
QERF1AM-227Z
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31CK-104X
QERF1CM-226Z
NCB31HK-103X
QERF1CM-106Z
QERF1AM-107Z
QERF1CM-226Z
NCB31AK-474X
QERF1AM-227Z
QERF1CM-107Z
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31HK-272X
QERF1AM-227Z
NDC31HJ-560X
QEZ0675-338
NCB31EK-104X
QERF1HM-225Z
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
100uF 6.3V M
220uF 10V M
0.1uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
220uF 10V M
0.047uF 25V K
100pF 50V J
8pF 50V J
27pF 50V J
27pF 50V J
22pF 50V J
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.22uF 16V K
100uF 6.3V M
100uF 16V M
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
1uF 50V M
0.1uF 16V K
22uF 16V M
0.1uF 25V K
220uF 10V M
220uF 10V M
0.01uF 50V K
0.1uF 16V K
22uF 16V M
0.01uF 50V K
10uF 16V M
100uF 10V M
22uF 16V M
0.47uF 10V K
220uF 10V M
100uF 16V M
0.047uF 25V K
2700pF 50V K
220uF 10V M
56pF 50V J
3300uF
0.1uF 25V K
2.2uF 50V M
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R51
R52
R53
R54
R55
R56
R57
R58
R59
R61
R71
R72
R73
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-270X
NRSA63J-100X
NRSA63J-393X
NRSA02J-220X
NRSA02J-220X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-332X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-471X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-393X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
47kΩ 1/16W J
27Ω 1/16W J
10Ω 1/16W J
39kΩ 1/16W J
22Ω 1/10W J
22Ω 1/10W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
3.3kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
470Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
39kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
Local
 Symbol No.
R74
R81
R82
R83
R91
R92
R93
R162
R163
R164
R166
R167
R168
R169
R170
R171
R177
R178
R182
R183
R184
R186
R187
R188
R197
R198
R241
R242
R243
R244
R245
R246
R247
R248
R251
R252
R253
R254
R255
R256
R257
R258
R259
R260
R261
R262
R263
R271
R272
R273
R274
R275
R276
R301
R302
R307
R308
R311
R312
R321
R322
R323
R331
R332
R333
R341
R342
R343
R351
R352
R353
R361
R362
R363
R364
R366
R367
R381
Part No.
Part Name
Description
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-273X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-273X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-124X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-184X
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-274X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-562X
NRSA63J-153X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-181X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-105X
NRSA63J-105X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-105X
NRSA63J-105X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-273X
NRSA63J-273X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-273X
NRSA63J-273X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-181X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-181X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-181X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-181X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-333X
NRSA63J-333X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
100Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
27kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
27kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
120kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
180kΩ 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
270kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
5.6kΩ 1/16W J
15kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
180Ω 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
1MΩ 1/16W J
1MΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1MΩ 1/16W J
1MΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
27kΩ 1/16W J
27kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
27kΩ 1/16W J
27kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
180Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
180Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
180Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
180Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
33kΩ 1/16W J
33kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
Local
 Symbol No.
R382
R383
R384
R386
R387
R702
R703
R704
R705
R706
R707
R708
R709
R710
R711
R712
R713
R714
R715
R716
R717
R718
R719
R720
R721
R722
R723
R725
R726
R727
R728
R729
R730
R731
R732
R733
R734
R735
R736
R737
R738
R739
R740
R741
R742
R745
R746
R747
R748
R749
R750
R751
R752
R753
R754
R755
R756
R757
R758
R759
R760
R761
R762
R763
R764
R766
R767
R768
R769
R770
R771
R772
R773
R774
R776
R777
R778
R780
Part No.
Part Name
Description
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-333X
NRSA63J-333X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-106X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-392X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-392X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-392X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
22kΩ 1/16W J
33kΩ 1/16W J
33kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10MΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
3.9kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
3.9kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
3.9kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
Local
3-9
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
R788
R789
R790
R791
R792
R794
R796
R797
R801
R802
R803
R804
R805
R806
R807
R808
R809
R810
R841
R852
R853
R881
R882
R883
R892
R893
R901
R902
R903
R904
R905
R906
R921
R922
R923
R924
R925
R926
R927
R951
R976
R977
R978
R979
R980
R981
R982
R983
RA701
VR921
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-223X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-332X
NRSA02J-222X
NRSA02J-222X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-562X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA02J-100X
NRSA02J-100X
NRSA02J-100X
NRSA02J-100X
NRSA63J-181X
NRSA63D-473X
NRSA63D-472X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-183X
NRS181J-222X
NRSA63J-912X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-223X
NRS181J-222X
NRZ0065-222X
NVP1505-473X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
TRIM RESISTOR
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
3.3kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/10W J
2.2kΩ 1/10W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
5.6kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10Ω 1/10W J
10Ω 1/10W J
10Ω 1/10W J
10Ω 1/10W J
180Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W D
4.7kΩ 1/16W D
1kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
18kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/8W J
9.1kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
22kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/8W J
2.2kΩ
47kΩ
L1
L701
L702
L703
L921
L922
L961
QQL244J-4R7Z
QQL244J-470Z
QQL244J-470Z
QQL244J-470Z
QQL244J-4R7Z
NQLZ007-151X
QQR1378-002
INDUCTIOR
COIL
COIL
COIL
INDUCTIOR
COIL
COIL
4.7uH J
47uH J
47uH J
47uH J
4.7uH J
150uH
BZ841
CN251
CN701
CN702
CN901
CN951
CN952
CN981
J1
J321
J801
PP1
PP2
PP3
TU1
X71
X701
X702
QAN0023-001Z
QGA2501C1-03
QGF1041C1-16W
QGB2027M4-22S
QNZ0650-001
QGA2501F1-02
QJB005-040909
QGA2006F1-02
QAM0556-001
QNN0490-001
QNZ0095-001
QZW0010-001
QZW0010-001
QZW0010-001
QAU0203-002
QAX0263-001Z
QAX0617-001Z
QAX0401-001
BUZZER
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CAR CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SIN ID C-B WIRE
CONNECTOR
ANT CABLE
PIN JACK
CONNECTOR
STYLE PIN
STYLE PIN
STYLE PIN
TUNER
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
3-10
W-B (1-3)
FFC/FPC (1-16)
B-B (1-22)
W-B (1-2)
W-B (1-2)
4.332MHz
12.500MHz
32.768KHz
Local
Front board
Block No. [0][2][0][0]
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
IC801
IC802
IC803
IC804
IC805
MN102H60KCN2
LH28F160BJHET95
IC-PST3424U-X
NJU7241F33-X
GP1UM261XK
IC
IC
IC
IC
IR DETECT UNIT
38kHz
Q400
Q401
Q402
Q403
Q404
Q405
Q406
Q407
Q408
Q409
Q410
Q411
Q412
Q413
Q420
Q421
Q422
Q423
Q424
Q425
Q480
Q801
Q802
Q803
Q804
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
UN2211-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
2SB709A/QR/-X
2SB709A/QR/-X
2SD601A/QR/-X
UN2111-X
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
D400
D401
D402
D403
D404
D405
D406
D407
D408
D409
D410
D411
D412
D413
D414
D415
D416
D417
D418
D419
D420
D421
D422
D423
D424
D425
D429
D430
D431
D451
D453
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
D806
D807
D808
D809
D810
D811
MA152WK-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-A12BC2T-X
SML-A12BC2T-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
SML-310LT/MN/-X
CL-190UB2-X-X
CL-190UB2-X-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
NSCM315C-W
NSCM315C-W
MA152WK-X
MA111-X
MA111-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
MA8062/M/-X
SI DIODE
LED
LED
LED
LED
BLUE LED
BLUE LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
LED
LED
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
SI DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Z DIODE
Local
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
D812
MA8062/M/-X
Z DIODE
C451
C452
C453
C457
C458
C459
C636
C637
C801
C802
C804
C805
C806
C807
C808
C809
C810
C811
C812
C813
C814
C815
C816
C817
C818
C819
C820
C821
C822
C823
C824
C825
C826
C827
C828
C829
C831
C834
C835
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NBE20JM-106X
NCB31EK-473X
NDC31HJ-471X
NDC31HJ-471X
NCB31EK-473X
NBE20JM-475X
NBE20JM-475X
NBE20JM-475X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NBE20JM-475X
NBE20JM-106X
NCB31AK-474X
NCB31AK-474X
NCB31AK-474X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NCB31EK-473X
NBE20JM-106X
NBE20JM-106X
NCB31EK-473X
NBE20JM-106X
NBE20JM-475X
NBE21VM-104X
NBE21CM-105X
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
10uF 6.3V M
0.047uF 25V K
470pF 50V J
470pF 50V J
0.047uF 25V K
4.7uF 6.3V M
4.7uF 6.3V M
4.7uF 6.3V M
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
4.7uF 6.3V M
10uF 6.3V M
0.47uF 10V K
0.47uF 10V K
0.47uF 10V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
0.047uF 25V K
10uF 6.3V M
10uF 6.3V M
0.047uF 25V K
10uF 6.3V M
4.7uF 6.3V M
0.1uF 35V M
1uF 16V M
0.1uF 25V K
R401
R402
R403
R404
R405
R406
R407
R408
R409
R410
R411
R412
R413
R414
R415
R416
R417
R418
R419
R420
R421
R422
R423
R424
R425
R426
R427
R428
R429
R430
R431
R432
R433
R434
R435
R436
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-122X
NRSA63J-122X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-471X
NRSA63J-471X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-681X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-561X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1.2kΩ 1/16W J
1.2kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
470Ω 1/16W J
470Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
680Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
Local
 Symbol No.
R437
R438
R439
R449
R450
R451
R452
R453
R454
R455
R456
R457
R479
R601
R602
R603
R604
R605
R606
R607
R608
R609
R610
R611
R612
R613
R614
R616
R801
R803
R804
R806
R807
R816
R817
R818
R819
R821
R822
R823
R824
R825
R826
R827
R828
R829
R830
R835
R836
R837
R838
R839
R840
R841
R842
R843
R844
R845
R846
R847
R865
R866
R867
R868
R869
R870
R872
R873
R874
R877
R878
R891
R892
R895
R896
R897
R898
R899
Part No.
Part Name
Description
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-301X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-301X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-301X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-391X
NRSA63J-561X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-152X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-822X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-152X
NRSA63J-152X
NRSA63J-152X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-225X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-474X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-471X
NRSA63J-224X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-474X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-331X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-0R0X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
300Ω 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
300Ω 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
300Ω 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
390Ω 1/16W J
560Ω 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
1.5kΩ 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
8.2kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
1.5kΩ 1/16W J
1.5kΩ 1/16W J
1.5kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
2.2MΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
470kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
470Ω 1/16W J
220kΩ 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
470kΩ 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
330Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
Local
3-11
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
RA801
RA802
RA803
RA804
RA805
RA806
RA807
RA808
RA809
RA810
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-102X
NRZ0065-102X
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-331X
NRZ0065-103X
NET RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
NET RESISTOR
330Ω
330Ω
330Ω
330Ω
1kΩ
1kΩ
330Ω
330Ω
330Ω
10kΩ
L801
NQL114K-470X
INDUCITOR
47uH K
CN801
CN802
JS801
S600
S601
S602
S603
S604
S605
S606
S607
S608
S609
S610
S611
S612
S613
S614
S615
S616
S617
S618
TH801
X801
NNZ0098-001X
QGF0523F1-40W
QSW0976-001
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NSW0124-001X
NAD0028-103X
NAX0652-001X
CAR CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
FFC/FPC (1-40)
ROTARY ENCODER
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
TACT SW
N THERMISTOR
10kΩ
RESONATOR
Local
Micon control board
Block No. [0][3][0][0]
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
IC501
IC502
IC503
IC504
IC571
IC572
IC573
IC601
IC621
IC651
IC652
IC681
TMP91CW12AF5GJ4
BR24L01AFV-W-X
SN74AHCT126PW-X
NJU7241F33-X
PCM1748KE-X
NJM4565V-X
SN74AHCU04PW-X
TA2157FN-X
TC94A14FA
NJU7772F15-X
TC94A34FG-002
BA5830FP-X
IC
IC
IC(DIGITAL)
IC
IC
IC
IC
RF AMP IC
CD LSI IC
IC
IC
IC
Q501
Q502
Q571
Q572
Q573
Q574
Q601
Q651
Q652
Q681
UN2111-X
UN2211-X
UN2111-X
UN2211-X
2SB624/4/-X
UN2211-X
2SB1132/QR/-W
2SB624/4/-X
UN2211-X
2SB1184/QR/-X
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
D506
D682
MA111-X
1SR154-400-X
SI DIODE
DIODE
C501
C502
C503
C504
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-107X
NDC31HJ-220X
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
3-12
Description
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
100uF 6.3V M
22pF 50V J
Local
 Symbol No.
C505
C506
C507
C508
C509
C510
C511
C512
C513
C514
C551
C571
C572
C573
C574
C575
C576
C577
C578
C581
C582
C583
C584
C585
C586
C587
C588
C589
C590
C591
C592
C593
C594
C595
C596
C597
C598
C601
C602
C603
C604
C605
C606
C607
C608
C609
C610
C611
C612
C613
C614
C616
C621
C622
C623
C624
C625
C626
C627
C628
C629
C630
C631
C632
C633
C634
C635
C636
C637
C638
C639
C640
C641
C642
C643
C644
C645
C646
Part No.
Part Name
Description
NDC31HJ-220X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31CK-104X
NEAD0JM-107X
NCB31HK-103X
NCS31HJ-102X
NCB31HK-103X
NDC31HJ-270X
NDC31HJ-270X
NCB31CK-104X
NEAD0JM-476X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31CK-104X
NEAD0JM-476X
NDC31HJ-101X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCS31HJ-821X
NCS31HJ-821X
NEAD1VM-475X
NEAD1VM-475X
NDC31HJ-121X
NDC31HJ-121X
NEAD1VM-475X
NEAD1VM-475X
NEAD0JM-476X
NEAD0JM-476X
NEAD1CM-476X
NCS31HJ-102X
NCB31CK-473X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCS31HJ-102X
NCS31HJ-102X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-107X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-682X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31CK-104X
NDC31HJ-5R0X
NDC31HJ-680X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-103X
NBE20JM-106X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-476X
NDC31HJ-470X
NCB31HK-153X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31HK-272X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31EK-333X
NCB31EK-333X
NDC31HJ-471X
NDC31HJ-471X
NCB31CK-473X
NCB31CK-473X
NCB31CK-473X
NCB31CK-473X
NCB31CK-473X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-476X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31AK-334X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
22pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.1uF 16V K
100uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
1000pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
27pF 50V J
27pF 50V J
0.1uF 16V K
47uF 6.3V M
47uF 6.3V M
0.1uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
47uF 6.3V M
100pF 50V J
100pF 50V J
820pF 50V J
820pF 50V J
4.7uF 35V M
4.7uF 35V M
120pF 50V J
120pF 50V J
4.7uF 35V M
4.7uF 35V M
47uF 6.3V M
47uF 6.3V M
47uF 16V M
1000pF 50V J
0.047uF 16V K
100pF 50V J
1000pF 50V J
1000pF 50V J
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
100uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
6800pF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
0.1uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
5pF 50V J
68pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
10uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
47pF 50V J
0.015uF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
2700pF 50V K
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
0.033uF 25V K
0.033uF 25V K
470pF 50V J
470pF 50V J
0.047uF 16V K
0.047uF 16V K
0.047uF 16V K
0.047uF 16V K
0.047uF 16V K
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
100pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
0.33uF 10V K
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
Local
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
C651
C652
C653
C654
C655
C656
C659
C660
C661
C662
C663
C664
C665
C666
C667
C668
C669
C682
C683
C684
C689
C690
C693
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31HK-103X
NCB31CK-104X
NCB31CK-104X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31HK-103X
NDC31HJ-101X
NBE20JM-106X
NCB31HK-222X
NCB31EK-104X
NDC31HJ-101X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD0JM-476X
NCB31HK-103X
NEAD1VM-475X
NCB31CK-104X
NEAD1CM-476X
NEAD1CM-476X
NBE20JM-106X
NEAD1CM-476X
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
C CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
TA E CAPACITOR
E CAPACITOR
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
0.1uF 16V K
0.01uF 50V K
0.1uF 16V K
0.1uF 16V K
100pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
100pF 50V J
10uF 6.3V M
2200pF 50V K
0.1uF 25V K
100pF 50V J
0.01uF 50V K
47uF 6.3V M
0.01uF 50V K
4.7uF 35V M
0.1uF 16V K
47uF 16V M
47uF 16V M
10uF 6.3V M
47uF 16V M
R501
R502
R503
R504
R505
R506
R507
R508
R509
R510
R511
R512
R513
R514
R515
R516
R517
R518
R519
R520
R521
R522
R523
R525
R526
R528
R530
R531
R532
R533
R534
R535
R536
R537
R539
R540
R541
R542
R543
R544
R545
R546
R547
R548
R549
R550
R551
R552
R553
R554
R555
R556
R557
R558
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-271X
NRSA63J-822X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-183X
NRSA63J-333X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
270Ω 1/16W J
8.2kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
18kΩ 1/16W J
33kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
Local
 Symbol No.
R559
R560
R561
R562
R563
R568
R569
R570
R572
R573
R574
R575
R576
R577
R578
R579
R581
R582
R583
R584
R585
R586
R587
R588
R589
R590
R591
R592
R593
R601
R602
R603
R604
R605
R606
R607
R608
R609
R610
R611
R612
R613
R614
R615
R616
R621
R622
R623
R624
R625
R626
R627
R628
R629
R630
R631
R632
R633
R634
R635
R636
R637
R638
R639
R640
R641
R642
R651
R654
R655
R656
R657
R668
R675
R681
R682
R683
R684
Part No.
Part Name
Description
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-392X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-225X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-470X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-203X
NRSA63J-203X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-303X
NRSA63J-303X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-4R7X
NRSA63J-823X
NRSA63J-823X
NRSA63J-334X
NRSA63J-334X
NRSA63J-220X
NRSA63J-220X
NRSA63J-823X
NRSA63J-821X
NRSA63J-563X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-202X
NRSA63J-102X
NRSA63J-153X
NRSA63J-151X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-470X
NRSA63J-470X
NRSA63J-470X
NRSA63J-562X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-474X
NRSA63J-153X
NRSA63J-155X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-0R0X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-101X
NRSA63J-105X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-472X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-104X
NRSA63J-470X
NRSA63J-103X
NRSA63J-473X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-470X
NRSA63J-221X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-222X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-822X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
0Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
3.9kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
2.2MΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
47Ω 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
20kΩ 1/16W J
20kΩ 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
30kΩ 1/16W J
30kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
4.7Ω 1/16W J
82kΩ 1/16W J
82kΩ 1/16W J
330kΩ 1/16W J
330kΩ 1/16W J
22Ω 1/16W J
22Ω 1/16W J
82kΩ 1/16W J
820Ω 1/16W J
56kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
2kΩ 1/16W J
1kΩ 1/16W J
15kΩ 1/16W J
150Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
47Ω 1/16W J
47Ω 1/16W J
47Ω 1/16W J
5.6kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
470kΩ 1/16W J
15kΩ 1/16W J
1.5MΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
0Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
100Ω 1/16W J
1MΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
4.7kΩ 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
100kΩ 1/16W J
47Ω 1/16W J
10kΩ 1/16W J
47kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
47Ω 1/16W J
220Ω 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
2.2kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
8.2kΩ 1/16W J
Local
3-13
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
R685
R686
R687
R688
R689
R690
R691
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-682X
NRSA63J-182X
NRSA63J-123X
NRSA63J-333X
NRSA63J-153X
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
MG RESISTOR
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
6.8kΩ 1/16W J
1.8kΩ 1/16W J
12kΩ 1/16W J
33kΩ 1/16W J
15kΩ 1/16W J
L501
L502
L571
L572
L621
L622
L623
L651
L652
L653
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
NQL114K-470X
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
INDUCITOR
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
47uH K
CN501
CN601
TH501
X501
X571
QGB2027L1-22X
QGF0527F2-22W
NAD0028-103X
NAX0385-001X
NAX0375-001X
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
N THERMISTOR
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
B-B (1-22)
FFC/FPC (1-22)
10kΩ
24.576MHz
16.9344MHz
3-14
Local
<MEMO>
3-15
Packing materials and accessories parts list
Block No. M 3 M M
P1
A1
P7
P6
P5
A18
P7
A19
P1
A2
P1
A3, A4, A5, A6, A7,
A8, A9, A10, A11
A22
P2
P4
KIT:
A12, A13, A14,
A15, A16
A20
A21
P3
A17
3-16
Packing and Accessories
Block No. [M][3][M][M]
 Symbol No.
Part No.
Part Name
Description
A 1
GET0203-001A
INST BOOK
ENG GER FRE
DUT
A 2
GET0203-002A
INST BOOK
A 2
GET0203-003A
INST BOOK
A 3
GET0203-005A
INSTALL MANUAL
A 4
GET0203-006A
INSTALL MANUAL
A 4
GET0203-007A
INSTALL MANUAL
A 5
GET0165-001A
DEMO MODE SHEET
A 5
GET0165-002A
DEMO MODE SHEET
A 6
A 7
A 8
A 9
A 10
A 11
A 12
A 13
A 14
A 15
A 16
A 17
A 18
A 19
A 20
A 21
A 22
KIT
P 1
P 2
P 3
P 4
P 5
P 6
P 7
LVT1120-002A
VND3046-001
BT-54013-7
LVT1121-001A
QAM0553-002
GET0213-001A
VKZ4027-202
VKH4871-001SS
VKZ4328-001
WNS5000Z
GE40130-002A
FSJB3002-00C
GE20137-003A
GE20164-001A
RM-RK60
-----------QAM0176-002
SRW-200J
FSPG4002-001
QPA00801205
FSYH4036-068
QPA01003003
QPC03004315P
GE31170-002A
GE10086-003A
MP3 GUIDE
SERIAL TICKET
WARRANTY CARD
IMAGE CONV.SHEE
CD-ROM
CAUTION SHEET
PLUG NUT
MOUNT BOLT
LOCK NUT
WASHER
HOOK
HARD CASE
MOUNTING SLEEVE
TRIM PLATE
REMOCON UNIT
BATTERY
POWER CORD
SCREW PARTS KIT
POLY BAG
POLY BAG
SHEET
POLY BAG
POLY BAG
INNER CTN
EPS CUSHION
Local
LH401
SPA ITA POL RUS E
SWE DAN FIN
LH401
GRE
EX
LH401
E
LH401
EX
LH401
E
LH401
EX
(x2)
A12 to A16
(x3)
8cm x 12cm
10cm x 30cm
30cm x 43cm
(x2)
3-17
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
CD RECEIVER
CD-RECEIVER
RECEPTEUR CD
CD-RECEIVER
NEDERLANDS
FRANÇAIS
KD-LH401
• This unit is equipped with the display demonstration. To cancel it, see page 8.
• Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Demonstrationsfunktion für das Display ausgestattet. Auf Seite 8 wird
beschrieben, wie Sie diese Demonstrationsfunktion deaktivieren können.
• Cet appareil est équipé d’une fonction de démonstration des affichages. Pour l’annuler, référezvous à la page 8.
• Dit toestel heeft een display-demonstratiefunctie. Zie bladzijde 8 voor het annuleren van deze
functie.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
Bijzonderheden over de installatie en aansluiting van het apparaat vindt u in de desbetreffende
handleiding.
INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
GET0203-001A
[E/EX]
Cover_001A_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
3
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all
servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid
direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Caution:
If the temperature inside the car is below 0˚ C, the movement of animation and text scroll will be halted on
the display to prevent the display from being blurred.
(LOW TEMP.) indicator appears on the display.
When the temperature increases, the operating temperature is resumed, and these functions will start
working again.
CAUTION on Volume Setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. If the volume level is adjusted for the tuner, for
example, the speakers may be damaged by the sudden increase in the output level. Therefore, lower the
volume before playing a disc and adjust it as required during playback.
Note:
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
How to reset your unit
CAUTION:
Press the reset button on
the control panel using a
ball-point pen or a similar
tool.
This will reset the built-in
microcomputer.
NEVER insert your finger in
between the control panel and
the unit, as it may get caught or
hurt.
(See page 54.)
Note:
Your preset adjustments—such as preset channels or sound
adjustments—will also be erased.
2
EN02-03_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
2
1/30/04, 5:30 PM
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product. Please read all instructions carefully before operation,
to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.
2
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS ....................... 37
LOCATION OF THE BUTTONS ............ 4
Downloading images and animations ....... 38
Deleting unwanted files ............................. 41
Activating the downloaded images and
animations .............................................. 43
How to reset your unit ...............................
Control panel .............................................
Illumination Navigation for easy
operations ...............................................
Remote controller ......................................
Preparing the remote controller ................
4
4
5
6
BASIC OPERATIONS ....................... 7
Turning on the power ................................
Canceling the display demonstration ........
Setting the clock ........................................
7
8
9
RADIO OPERATIONS ...................... 10
Listening to the radio .................................
Storing stations in memory .......................
Tuning in to a preset station ......................
Changing the display pattern ....................
10
12
14
15
RDS OPERATIONS ......................... 16
What you can do with RDS ....................... 16
Other convenient RDS functions and
adjustments ............................................ 21
DISC OPERATIONS ........................ 23
About MP3 and WMA discs ......................
Playing a disc ............................................
Locating a track or a particular portion
on a disc .................................................
Selecting a folder and a track using the
name lists ...............................................
Selecting the playback modes ..................
Prohibiting disc ejection ............................
Changing the display pattern ....................
23
23
26
28
29
30
31
SOUND ADJUSTMENTS ................... 32
Adjusting the sound ..................................
Selecting preset sound modes
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer) ......................
Storing your own sound modes ................
Selecting the display theme ......................
32
ENGLISH
CONTENTS
OTHER MAIN FUNCTIONS ................ 45
Changing the general settings (PSM) .......
Selecting the dimmer mode ......................
Changing the display color ........................
Assigning names to the sources ...............
Changing the control panel angle .............
Detaching the control panel ......................
45
50
51
53
54
55
CD CHANGER OPERATIONS .............. 56
Playing discs ............................................. 56
Selecting a disc/folder/track using the
name lists ............................................... 59
Selecting the playback modes .................. 60
EXTERNAL COMPONENT OPERATIONS ... 62
Playing an external component ................. 62
Changing the display pattern .................... 62
DAB TUNER OPERATIONS ................ 63
Tuning in to an ensemble and one of the
services ..................................................
Storing DAB services in memory ..............
Tuning in to a preset DAB service .............
What you can do more with DAB ..............
Changing the display pattern ....................
63
65
66
67
70
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................... 71
MAINTENANCE ............................. 74
Handling discs ........................................... 74
SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 75
33
35
36
BEFORE USE
*For safety....
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
*Temperature inside the car....
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the
car becomes normal before operating the unit.
3
EN02-03_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
3
1/30/04, 5:30 PM
LOCATION OF THE BUTTONS
ENGLISH
Control panel
1 2
3
9
p
4
5 6
q
w er t y
1 Control dial
(standby/on attenuator) button
2
3 TP/PTY (traffic programme/programme type)
button
4 Display window
5 5 (up) button
6 FM/AM DAB button
7 0 (eject) button
(angle) button
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
7 8
4
/¢
buttons
SEL (select) button
D DISP (display) button
Number buttons
M MODE button
Remote sensor
∞ (down) button
CD/CD-CH (CD changer) button
(control panel release) button
Illumination Navigation for easy operations
If you use M MODE or SEL (select), the display and some controls (such as the number buttons,
4
/¢
, 5/∞, and control dial) enter the corresponding control mode, then the controls
start flashing to lead you to the next operational steps. (Illumination Navigation)
• The display shows how these buttons function during this period.
Ex.: When you press number button 1 after pressing M MODE, to operate the FM tuner.
Time countdown indicator
To use these controls for original functions again, wait until the controls stop flashing without
using these controls.
• Pressing M MODE again also restores original functions. However, pressing SEL (select) makes
the unit enters a different mode.
4
EN04-06_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
4
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
Remote controller
S
ENGLISH
3 • Selects the preset stations (or service) while
listening to the radio (or the DAB tuner).
Each time you press the button, the preset
station (or service) number increases, and
the selected station (or service) is tuned in.
• Skips to the first track of the previous folder
while listening to an MP3 disc or a WMA
disc.
Each time you press the button, you can
move to the previous folder and start playing
the first track.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3compatible CD changer;
– Skips to the previous disc if pressed
briefly.
– Skips to the previous folder if pressed and
held.
Note: While playing a CD on a CD changer, this
always skips to the previous disc.
4 Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
Each time you press the button, the sound
mode (iEQ) changes.
1 • Turns on the unit if pressed when the unit is
turned off.
• Turns off the unit if pressed and held for a
few seconds.
• Drops the volume level in a moment if
pressed briefly.
Press again to resume the volume.
2 • Searches for stations while listening to the
radio.
• Selects services while listening to the DAB
tuner if pressed briefly.
• Searches for ensembles while listening to
the DAB tuner if pressed for more than one
second.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held while listening to a disc.
• Skips to the beginning of the next track or
goes back to the beginning of the current (or
previous) tracks if pressed briefly while
listening to a disc.
5 • Selects the band while listening to the radio
(or the DAB tuner).
Each time you press the button, the band
changes.
• Skips to the first track of the next folder
while listening to an MP3 disc or a WMA
disc.
Each time you press the button, you can
move to the next folder and start playing the
first track.
• While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3compatible CD changer;
– Skips to the next disc if pressed briefly.
– Skips to the next folder if pressed and
held.
Note: While playing a CD on a CD changer, this
always skips to the next disc.
6 Selects the source.
Each time you press the button, the source
changes.
7 Functions the same as the control dial on the
main unit.
Note: These buttons do not function for the
preferred setting mode (PSM) adjustment.
5
EN04-06_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
5
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
ENGLISH
Preparing the remote controller
Before using the remote controller:
• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the main unit. Make sure there is no
obstacle in between.
Remote sensor
• Do not expose the remote sensor to strong
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Installing the battery
When the controllable range or effectiveness of
the remote controller decreases, replace the
battery.
1. Remove the battery holder.
1) Push out the battery holder in the direction
indicated by the arrow using a ball-point
pen or a similar tool.
2) Remove the battery holder.
3. Return the battery holder.
Insert again the battery holder by pushing it
until you hear a clicking sound.
(back side)
WARNING:
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach.
If a child accidentally swallows the battery,
consult a doctor immediately.
• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, or heat the
battery or dispose of it in a fire.
Doing any of these things may cause the battery
to give off heat, crack, or start a fire.
• Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
Doing this may cause the battery to give off
heat, crack, or start a fire.
• When throwing away or saving the battery,
wrap it in tape and insulate; otherwise, the
battery may start to give off heat, crack, or start
a fire.
• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
Doing this may cause the battery to give off
heat, crack, or start a fire.
(back side)
CAUTION:
DO NOT leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for
a long time. Otherwise, it may be damaged.
2. Place the battery.
Slide the battery into the holder with the +
side facing upwards so that the battery is
fixed in the holder.
Lithium coin battery
(product number:
CR2025)
KD-LH401 is equipped with the steering
wheel remote control function.
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel
remote controller, you can operate this
receiver using the controller.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume) for connection to utilize
this function.
6
EN04-06_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
6
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
ENGLISH
BASIC OPERATIONS
Turning on the power
1
3
Adjust the volume.
To increase the volume
Turn on the power.
To decrease the volume
Volume level appears.
Note on One-Touch Operation:
When you select a source in step 2 below, the
power automatically comes on. You do not have
to press this button to turn on the power.
2
Select the source.
• To operate the FM/AM tuner, press
FM/AM DAB.
To operate the DAB tuner, press and
hold FM/AM DAB.
* Without connecting the DAB tuner, you
cannot select “DAB” as the source.
• To operate the CD player (CD),
CD changer (CD-CH), or external
component (LINE IN), press CD/CD-CH
repeatedly.
Current sound mode (iEQ)
(see page 33)
4
Adjust the sound as you want.
(See pages 32 – 35.)
Note:
While playing a source, you can select the display
theme of your preference. For details, see “Selecting
the display theme” on page 36.
NOTICE:
The illustrations of the display used in this manual
are mainly of the initial setting when shipped from
the factory. If you have changed the display
patterns or some PSM items, the actual displays
you see will be different.
*1 Without loading the CD, you cannot select
“CD” as the source.
*2 Without connecting the CD changer, you
cannot select “CD-CH” as the source.
*3 To select “LINE IN” as the source, select
“Line In” for the “Ext Input” setting on
page 49.
7
EN07-09_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
7
4/2/04, 5:53 PM
ENGLISH
To drop the volume in a moment
2
Press
briefly while listening to any
source. “ATT” starts flashing on the display, and
the volume level will drop in a moment.
To resume the previous volume level, press the
button briefly again.
• If you turn the control dial, you can also restore
the sound.
Press number button 1 to select
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the
PSM settings.
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on
the display.
To turn off the power
Press and hold
for more than one
second.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a
disc, disc play will start from where playback
has been stopped previously, next time you
turn on the power.
3
Select “Off.”
4
Finish the setting.
Canceling the display
demonstration
When shipped from the factory, display
demonstration has been activated, and starts
automatically when no operations are done for
about 20 seconds.
• It is recommended to cancel the display
demonstration before you use the unit for the
first time.
To cancel the display demonstration, follow
the procedure below:
1
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
To activate the display demonstration, repeat
the same procedure and select “Int Demo” or “All
Demo” in step 3.
• For more details, see “To show the graphics on
the display—Graphics” on page 48.
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
8
EN07-09_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
8
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
1 Select “24H/12H.”
2 Select “24Hours” or “12Hours.”
You can also set the clock system to either
24 hours or 12 hours.
1
1
2
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
2
Set the clock system.
ENGLISH
5
Setting the clock
6
Finish the setting.
Press number button 2 to select
“CLOCK”—Clock category of the
PSM settings.
The “Clock Hr” (hour) setting screen
appears on the display.
To check the clock time when the unit is
turned off, press D DISP.
The power turns on and the clock time is shown
for about 5 seconds, then the power turns off.
3
Adjust the hour.
4
Set the minute.
1 Select “Clock Min” (minute).
2 Adjust the minute.
1
2
9
EN07-09_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
9
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
ENGLISH
RADIO OPERATIONS
Listening to the radio
You can use either automatic searching or manual
searching to tune in to a particular station.
2
Start searching for a station.
To search for stations of
higher frequencies
Searching for a station automatically:
Auto search
To search for stations of lower frequencies
1
When a station is received, searching stops.
Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).
Each time you press the
button, the band changes as
follows:
To stop searching before a station is received,
press the same button you have pressed for
searching.
Selected band appears.
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Note:
This receiver has three FM bands (FM1, FM2,
FM3). You can use any one of them to listen to
an FM broadcast.
10
EN10-15_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
10
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
1
Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).
Each time you press the
button, the band changes as
follows:
Note:
This receiver has three FM bands (FM1, FM2,
FM3). You can use any one of them to listen to
an FM broadcast.
2
3
If the sound quality decreases and the
stereo effect is lost while listening to an
FM station
In some areas, adjacent stations may
interfere with each other. If this interference
occurs, this unit can automatically reduce this
interference noise (the initial setting when
shipped from the factory). However, in this
case, the sound quality will be degraded and
the stereo effect will also be lost.
If you do not want to degrade the sound
quality and to lose the stereo effect, rather
than to eliminate the interference noise, see
“To change the FM tuner selectivity—IF Filter”
on page 49.
ENGLISH
Searching for a station manually:
Manual search
Press and hold ¢
or 4
until “Manual Search” starts flashing
on the display.
Tune in to a station you want while
“Manual Search” is flashing.
To tune in to stations of
higher frequencies
To tune in to stations of lower frequencies
• If you release your finger from the button,
the manual mode automatically turns off
after about 5 seconds.
• If you hold down the button, the frequency
keeps changing (in 50 kHz intervals for
FM and 9 kHz for AM—MW/LW) until you
release the button.
11
EN10-15_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
11
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
ENGLISH
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive:
Storing stations in memory
Set the FM reception mode to “Mono On.”
You can use one of the following two methods to
store broadcasting stations in memory.
• Automatic preset of FM stations: SSM (Strongstation Sequential Memory)
• Manual preset of both FM and AM stations
1 Press M MODE while listening to an FM
stereo broadcast.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 1 to select “Mono On”
while “Mode” is still on the display.
Each time you press the button, “Mono On” or
“Mono Off” appears alternately.
FM station automatic preset: SSM
You can preset 6 local FM stations in each FM
band (FM1, FM2, and FM3).
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – 3) you
want to store FM stations into.
Each time you press the
button, the band changes as
follows:
2
Start automatic preset.
1 Press M MODE.
After about
5 seconds
The display returns to the source indication
screen.
“Mode” appears on the
display.
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
2 Press and hold number button 5 while
“Mode” is still on the display.
MONO indicator appears.
The sound you hear becomes monaural but the
reception will be improved.
“SSM” appears, then disappears
when automatic preset is over.
12
EN10-15_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
12
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
3
Press and hold the number button
(in this example, 1) for more than
2 seconds.
ENGLISH
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the band
number you have selected (FM1, FM2, or FM3).
These stations are preset in the number buttons
—No.1 (lowest frequency) to No.6 (highest
frequency).
When automatic preset is over, the station stored
in number button 1 will be automatically tuned in.
The display pattern automatically changes
to the small animation display (see page
15).
Manual preset
You can preset up to 6 stations in each band
(FM1, FM2, FM3, and AM) manually.
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into the
preset number 1 of the FM1 band.
1
Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM) you
want to store stations into (in this
example, FM1).
After about
5 seconds
Each time you press the
button, the band changes as
follows:
2
Tune in to a station (in this example,
of 92.5 MHz).
To tune in to stations of
higher frequencies
To tune in to stations of lower frequencies
Preset number appears.
4
Repeat the above procedure to store
other stations into other preset
numbers.
Notes:
• A previously preset station is erased when a new
station is stored in the same preset number.
• Preset stations are erased when the power supply to
the memory circuit is interrupted (for example,
during battery replacement). If this occurs, preset
the stations again.
13
EN10-15_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
13
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
ENGLISH
Tuning in to a preset station
You can easily tune in to a preset station.
Remember that you must store stations first. If
you have not stored them yet, see “Storing
stations in memory” on pages 12 and 13.
Selecting a preset station directly
1
Selecting a preset station using the
preset station list
If you forget what stations are stored in which
preset numbers, you can check the preset station
list, then select your desired station.
1
Each time you press the
button, the band changes as
follows:
Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).
Each time you press the
button, the band changes as
follows:
2
2
Select the band (FM1 – 3, AM).
Select the number (1 – 6) for the
preset station you want.
Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
until the preset station list for the
current band (FM1, FM2, FM3, or AM)
appears on the display.
The current station will be
highlighted on the display.
Ex.: When you select the preset station
number 1 of the FM1 band
Notes:
• You can show the other FM band preset
station lists (FM1, FM2, or FM3) by pressing
5 (up) or ∞ (down).
• If a preset station is an FM RDS station with
PS (programme station) signal, PS name will
be shown instead of the station frequency.
3
Select the number (1 – 6) for the
preset station you want.
14
EN10-15_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
14
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
By pressing D DISP, you can change the information shown on the display.
Each time you press the button, the display patterns change as follows:
• When receiving an AM or non FM RDSstation
Large animation display
Current sound mode
(iEQ) (see page 33)
ENGLISH
Changing the display pattern
• When receiving an FM RDS-station
(see the following pages)
Large animation display
Appears only when
selecting a preset
station.
Small animation display 1
PS name
Current sound mode
(iEQ) (see page 33)
Small animation display 1
Clock time
Small animation display 2*
Clock time
Small animation display 2
* Only for non FM RDS-station
Clock time display
PTY code appears.
Clock time display
15
EN10-15_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
15
11/2/04, 3:18 PM
ENGLISH
RDS OPERATIONS
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to
send an additional signal along with their regular
programme signals. For example, the stations
send their station names, as well as information
about what type of programme they broadcast,
such as sports or music, etc.
Another advantage of RDS function is called
“Enhanced Other Networks.” By using the
Enhanced Other Networks data sent from a
station, you can tune in to a different station of a
different network broadcasting your favorite
programme or traffic announcement while
listening to another programme or to another
source such as CD.
To use Network-Tracking Reception
You can select the different modes of networktracking reception to continue listening to the
same programme in its finest reception.
When shipped from the factory, “AF” is selected.
• AF:
Network-Tracking Reception is
activated without Regionalization.
With this setting, the unit switches to
another station within the same
network when the receiving signals
from the current station become
weak. (In this mode, the programme
may differ from the one currently
received.)
The AF indicator lights up.
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Tracing the same programme automatically
(Network-Tracking Reception)
• TA Standby Reception or your favorite
programme
• PTY (Programme Type) search
• Programme search
• And some other functions
• AF Reg: Network-Tracking Reception is
activated with Regionalization.
With this setting, the unit switches to
another station, within the same
network, broadcasting the same
programme when the receiving
signals from the current station
become weak.
The REG indicator lights up.
Tracing the same programme
automatically (Network-Tracking
Reception)
• Off*:
When driving in an area where FM reception is
not good, the tuner built in this unit automatically
tunes in to another RDS station, broadcasting the
same programme with stronger signals. So, you
can continue to listen to the same programme in
its finest reception, no matter where you drive.
(See the illustration on page 22.)
Two types of the RDS data are used to make
Network-Tracking Reception work correctly
—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency).
Without receiving these data correctly from the
RDS station you are listening to, NetworkTracking Reception will not operate.
Network-Tracking Reception is
deactivated.
Neither the AF nor the REG indicator
lights up.
* You can select only when “DAB AF”
is set to “Off.” (See page 47 for
details.)
AF or REG indicator lights up.
Note:
If a DAB tuner is connected and Alternative Reception
(for DAB services) is activated, Network-Tracking
Reception is also activated (“AF”) automatically. On
the other hand, Network-Tracking Reception cannot
be deactivated without deactivating Alternative
Reception. (See page 69.)
16
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
16
10/2/04, 9:00 PM
2
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
Press number button 4 to select
“TUNER”—Tuner category of the
PSM settings.
The “PTY Stnby” (standby) setting screen
appears on the display.
Using TA Standby Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to the Traffic Announcement (TA)
from the current source (another FM station, CD,
or other connected components).
• See also “Road Traffic News Standby Reception
(TA Standby Reception)” on page 67.
ENGLISH
1
Press TP/PTY to activate TA
Standby Reception.
Each time your press the button,
this function is turned on and off
alternately.
TP indicator appears.
(either lights up or flashes)
3
4
5
Select “AF-Regn’l” (alternative
frequency/regionalization
reception).
Select the desired mode—“AF,”
“AF Reg,” or “Off.”
Finish the setting.
Note:
TA Standby Reception will not work if you are
listening to an AM station.
7 When the current source is FM, the TP
indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby
Reception is activated.
If a station starts broadcasting a traffic
announcement, “Traffic News” appears on
the display, and this unit automatically tunes
in to the station. The volume changes to the
preset TA volume level (see page 21) and the
traffic announcement can be heard.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby
Reception is not yet activated since the
station being received does not provide the
signals used for TA Standby Reception.
To activate TA Standby Reception, you need
to tune in to another station providing these
signals. Press ¢
or 4
to search
for such a station.
When a station providing these signals is
tuned in, the TP indicator stops flashing and
remains lit. Now TA Standby Reception is
activated.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
17
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
17
11/2/04, 3:04 PM
ENGLISH
7 When the current source is other than FM,
the TP indicator lights up.
If a station starts broadcasting a traffic
announcement, “Traffic News” appears on the
display, and this unit automatically changes the
source and tunes in to the station.
Using PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite programme (PTY:
Programme Type) from any source except AM
stations.
• See also “Using PTY Standby Reception” on
page 69.
To select your favorite PTY code for PTY
Standby Reception
When shipped from factory, PTY Standby
Reception has been set to search for “News”
programmes.
You can select your favorite programme type for
PTY Standby Reception.
1
2
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
3
Select one of the twenty-nine PTY
codes. (See page 22.)
Selected code name
appears on the display and
is stored into memory.
4
Finish the setting.
To set PTY Standby Reception
If a DAB tuner is connected, the following
operations will set PTY Standby Reception for
both the FM tuner and DAB tuner. (See page 69.)
1 Press M MODE while listening to an FM
broadcast.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 3 to activate PTY
Standby Reception while “Mode” is still on the
display.
Each time you press the button, PTY Standby
Reception turns on and off alternately.
Press number button 4 to select
“TUNER”—Tuner category of the
PSM settings.
The “PTY Stnby” (standby) setting screen
appears on the display.
Ex.: When the currently selected PTY code
for PTY Standby Reception is “News”
After about
5 seconds
The display returns to the source indication
screen.
PTY indicator appears.
(either lights up or flashes)
18
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
18
4/2/04, 5:16 PM
Note:
After turning on PTY Standby Reception, you can
change the source without canceling PTY Standby
Reception. If a station starts broadcasting the selected
PTY programme, this unit automatically changes the
source and tunes in to the station.
• If you change the source to AM, PTY Standby
Reception will be temporarily canceled.
• You can only deactivate the PTY Standby Reception
when the source is FM.
Searching for your favorite programme
You can search for any one of the PTY codes.
In addition, you can store your 6 favorite
programme types in the number buttons.
When shipped from the factory, the following
6 programme types have been stored in the
number buttons (1 to 6).
• See also “Searching for your favorite service”
on page 69.
ENGLISH
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby
Reception is activated.
If a station starts broadcasting the selected
PTY programme, this unit automatically tunes
in to the station.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby
Reception is not yet activated since the station
being received does not provide the signals
used for PTY Standby Reception.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, you need
to tune in to another station providing these
signals. Press ¢
or 4
to search for
such a station.
When a station providing these signals is tuned
in, the PTY indicator stops flashing and
remains lit. Now PTY Standby Reception is
activated.
To store your favorite programme types, see
below and page 20.
To search for your favorite programme type,
see page 20.
To store your favorite programme types
1
Press and hold TP/PTY for more
than 2 seconds while listening to an
FM station.
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Ex.: If you have selected “Pop M” previously
2
Select one of the twenty-nine PTY
codes. (See page 22.)
Selected code name
appears on the display.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
19
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
19
11/2/04, 3:04 PM
ENGLISH
3
Press and hold the number button
for more than 2 seconds to store the
PTY code selected into the preset
number you want.
Ex.: When “Rock M” is selected
How to use the 5 (up) or ∞ (down) button
By pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down) repeatedly,
you can show the list of your preset PTY
codes and all twenty-nine PTY codes (six
PTY codes at a time). First, the list of your
stored PTY codes appears, then all twentynine PTY codes (six PTY codes at a time)
appears in sequence.
Press the number button to select your
desired PTY code on the list currently shown
on the display.
Selected preset number flashes for a while.
4
Press and hold TP/PTY for more than
2 seconds to exit from this mode.
To search for your favorite programme
type
1
3
Start PTY search for your favorite
programme.
Press and hold TP/PTY for more
than 2 seconds while listening to an
FM station.
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Ex.: If you have selected “Pop M” previously
2
To select one of your favorite
programme type
• If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected,
that station is tuned in.
• If there is no station broadcasting a
programme of the same PTY code as you have
selected, the station will not change.
Note:
In some areas, the PTY search will not work correctly.
or
To select any one of the twenty-nine
PTY codes
or
20
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
20
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
2 Press number button 4 to select “TUNER”—
Automatic selection of the station
when using the number buttons
volume.
You can set it from “Volume 0” to “Volume 30”
or “Volume 50” (depending on the amplifier
gain control setting: see page 49).
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.
Usually when you press the number button, the
preset station is tuned in.
However, when the preset station is an RDS
station, something different will happen. If the
signals from that preset station are not sufficient
for good reception, this unit, using the AF data,
tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting. (Programme search)
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
To activate programme search, follow the
procedure below.
• See also “Changing the general settings
(PSM)” on page 45.
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items
appears on the display.
2 Press number button 4 to select “TUNER”—
Tuner category of the PSM settings.
3 Press ¢
or 4
to select
“P(Programme)-Search.”
4 Turn the control dial clockwise to select “On.”
Now programme search is activated.
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.
To cancel programme search, repeat the same
procedure and select “Off” in step 4 by turning
the control dial counterclockwise.
Setting the TA volume level
You can preset the volume level for TA Standby
Reception. When a traffic programme is received,
the volume level automatically changes to the
preset level.
• See also “Changing the general settings
(PSM)” on page 45.
Tuner category of the PSM settings.
3 Press ¢
or 4
to select “TA Volume.”
4 Turn the control dial to set to the desired
ENGLISH
Other convenient RDS
functions and adjustments
Automatic clock adjustment
When shipped from the factory, the clock built in
this unit is set to be readjusted automatically
using the CT (Clock Time) data in the RDS
signal.
If you do not want to use automatic clock
adjustment, follow the procedure below.
• See also “Changing the general settings
(PSM)” on page 45.
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items
appears on the display.
2 Press number button 2 to select “CLOCK”—
Clock category of the PSM settings.
3 Press ¢
or 4
to select “Auto Adj”
(adjustment).
4 Turn the control dial counterclockwise to select
“Off.”
Now automatic clock adjustment is canceled.
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.
To reactivate clock adjustment, repeat the
same procedure and select “On” in step 4 by
turning the control dial clockwise.
Note:
You must stay tuned to the same station for more than
2 minutes after setting “Auto Adj” to “On.”
Otherwise, the clock time will not be adjusted. (This is
because the unit takes up to 2 minutes to capture the
CT data in the RDS signal.)
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items
appears on the display.
21
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
21
10/2/04, 9:01 PM
ENGLISH
PTY codes
News:
Affairs:
Info:
Sport:
Educate:
Drama:
Culture:
Science:
Varied:
Pop M:
Rock M:
Easy M:
Light M:
Classics:
Other M:
Weather:
Finance:
Children:
News
Topical programmes expanding on
current news or affairs
Programmes which impart advice
on a wide variety of topics
Sport events
Educational programmes
Radio plays
Programmes on national or
regional culture
Programmes on natural science
and technology
Other programmes like comedies
or ceremonies
Pop music
Rock music
Easy-listening music
Light music
Classical music
Other music
Weather information
Reports on commerce, trading, the
Stock Market, etc.
Entertainment programmes for
children
Social:
Religion:
Programmes on social activities
Programmes dealing with any
aspect of belief or faith, or the
nature of existence or ethics
Phone In: Programmes where people can
express their views either by
phone or in a public forum
Travel:
Programmes about travel
destinations, package tours, and
travel ideas and opportunities
Leisure:
Programmes concerned with
recreational activities such as
gardening, cooking, fishing, etc.
Jazz:
Jazz music
Country:
Country music
Nation M: Current popular music from
another nation or region, in that
country’s language
Oldies:
Classic pop music
Folk M:
Folk music
Document: Programmes dealing with factual
matters, presented in an
investigative style
The same programme can be received on different frequencies.
Programme 1
broadcasting on
frequency A
Programme 1
broadcasting on
frequency B
Programme 1
broadcasting on
frequency E
Programme 1
broadcasting on
frequency C
Programme 1
broadcasting on
frequency D
22
EN16-22_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
22
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
ENGLISH
DISC OPERATIONS
This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs,
CD-Rs (Recordable), CD-RWs (Rewritable), and
CD Texts.
• This unit is also compatible with MP3 and
WMA discs. For details about these discs,
refer to “A Guide to MP3/WMA” (separate
volume).
Playing a disc
1
About MP3 and WMA discs
MP3 and WMA (Windows Media® Audio) “tracks”
(the word “file” is not used to indicate MP3 or
WMA files, “track” is used in this manual) are
recorded in “folders.”
During recording, the tracks and folders can be
arranged in a way similar to arranging files and
folders of computer data.
“Root” is similar to the root of a tree. Every track
and folder can be linked to and be accessed from
the root.
Open the control panel.
Note on One-Touch Operation:
When a disc is already in the loading slot,
pressing CD/CD-CH turns on the unit and starts
playback automatically.
2
Insert a disc into the loading slot.
The unit draws the disc,
the control panel goes
back to the previous
position (see page
54), and playback
starts automatically.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
stop playback.
Note:
For details on playable discs and other related
information, see page 74.
: Folders and their playback order
: MP3/WMA tracks and their playback
order
About mistracking:
Mistracking may result from driving on extremely
rough roads. This does not damage the unit and
the disc, but will be annoying.
We recommend that you stop disc play while
driving on such rough roads.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
23
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
23
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
Display indications when inserting an audio
CD or a CD Text:
Total track number and total
playing time of the inserted CD
Display indications when inserting an MP3
or a WMA discs:
Total folder and track numbers
MP3 indicator*
Current track and elapsed playing time
Notes:
• MP3 or WMA discs require a longer readout time.
(It differs due to the complexity of the folder/track
configuration.)
• The unit cannot read or play an MP3 track
without the extension code <.mp3>, and a WMA
track without the extension code <.wma>.
To stop play and eject the disc
Press 0 (eject).
Disc play stops and the control panel moves
down. The disc automatically ejects from the
loading slot. The source changes to the
previously selected source.
• If you change the source or turn the power off,
disc play also stops (without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” as the source or turn
the power on, disc play starts from where
playback has been stopped previously.
Current folder/track and elapsed playing time
* WMA or MP3 indicator lights up depending on the
first detected track.
Notes:
• If the ejected disc is not removed for about
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again
into the loading slot to protect it from dust.
(Disc play will not start this time.)
• You can eject the disc even when the unit is turned
off.
To return the control panel to its previous
position, press 0 (eject) again.
• If you keep the loading slot fully open for about
1 minute, (beeps sound when the “Beep”
setting is turned “On”—see page 49) the
control panel automatically returns to its
previous position.
Be careful not to get the disc or your finger
caught in between the control panel and the
unit.
24
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
24
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
When an MP3 or a WMA folder includes an
image <jml> file edited by Image Converter
(supplied in the CD-ROM), you can show the
image on the display while the tracks in the
folder are played back.
• While reading an image <jml> file, no
sounds come out (“Image Link” is shown on
the display during this period).
To activate ImageLink, follow the procedure
below:
• See also “Changing the general settings
(PSM)” on page 45.
ENGLISH
What is ImageLink?
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items
appears on the display.
2 Press number button 1 to select “MOVIE”—
Movie category of the PSM settings.
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on
the display.
3 Turn the control dial to select “ImageLink.”
4 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.
ImageLink starts functioning when the next
folder starts playing.
Note:
ImageLink will not work in the following cases:
• If no <jml> file is included in an MP3/WMA
folder.
• If Intro Scan is activated.
• If the source is changed to any other than “CD,” or
• If you turn off then on the unit while “Image Link”
is shown on the display.
If there are more than one <jml> file in a
folder, a <jml> file with younger playback
order number will be shown on the display
(in the above example, “Photo2.jml” will be
used for Album 2).
25
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
25
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
Locating a track or a
particular portion on a disc
To go to a track quickly
1 Press M MODE while playing a disc.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
Press and hold ¢
,
while playing a disc, to
fast-forward the track.
Press and hold 4
reverse the track.
, while playing a disc, to
See page 38 for this function.
Note:
During this operation on an MP3 or a WMA disc, you
can only hear intermittent sounds. (The elapsed
playing time also changes intermittently on the
display.)
2 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) while “Mode” is still
on the display.
To skip 10 tracks* forwards
to the last track
To skip 10 tracks* backwards
to the first track
To go to the next or previous tracks
briefly, while
Press ¢
playing a disc, to go ahead
to the beginning of the next
track.
Each time you press the
button consecutively, the
beginning of the next tracks
is located and played back.
Press 4
briefly, while playing a disc, to go
back to the beginning of the current track.
Each time you press the button consecutively,
the beginning of the previous tracks is located
and played back.
To go to a particular track directly
(Only for CD and CD Text discs)
* First time you press 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
button, the track skips to the nearest higher
or lower track with a track number of multiple
ten (ex. 10th, 20th, 30th).
Then each time you press the button, you can
skip 10 tracks (see “How to go to the desired
track quickly” below).
• After the last track, the first track will be
selected, and vice versa.
Note:
If the current playing disc is an MP3 or a WMA disc,
tracks are skipped within the same folder.
How to go to the desired track quickly
• Ex. 1: To select track number 32 while
playing track number 6
Press the number button corresponding to the
track number to start its playback.
Track 6
(Three times)
\ 10 \ 20 \ 30
(Twice)
\ 31 \ 32
• Ex. 2 : To select track number 8 while
playing track number 36
• To select a track number from 01 – 06:
Press 1 (7) – 6 (12) briefly.
• To select a track number from 07 – 12:
Press and hold 1 (7) – 6 (12) for more than one
second.
Track 36
(Three times)
\ 30 \ 20 \ 10
26
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
26
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
(Twice)
\9\8
IMPORTANT:
To directly select the folders using the number
button(s), it is required that folders are
assigned 2 digit numbers at the beginning of
their folder names. (This can only be done
during the recording of CD-Rs or CD-RWs.)
Ex.: If folder name is “01 ABC”
= Press 1 to go to Folder 01 ABC.
If folder name is “1 ABC,” pressing 1
does not work.
If folder name is “12 ABC”
= Press and hold 6 (12) to go to Folder
12 ABC.
Press the number button corresponding to the
folder number to start playing the first track in the
selected folder.
To skip to the next or previous folder
(Only possible for MP3 or WMA disc)
Press 5 (up) while playing a disc
to skip to the next folder.
Each time you press the button
consecutively, the next folder is
located and the first track in the
folder starts playing.
ENGLISH
To go to a particular folder directly
(Only possible for MP3 or WMA disc)
Press ∞ (down) while playing a disc to skip back
to the previous folder.
Each time you press the button consecutively,
the previous folder is located and the first track in
the folder starts playing.
Note:
If the folder does not contain any MP3 or WMA
tracks, it is skipped.
• To select a folder number from 01 – 06:
Press 1 (7) – 6 (12) briefly.
• To select a folder number from 07 – 12:
Press and hold 1 (7) – 6 (12) for more than one
second.
Notes:
• If “No Music” appears on the display after you
have selected a folder, it means that the folder does
not contain any MP3 or WMA tracks.
• You cannot directly select a folder with a number
greater than 12.
To select a particular track in a folder, press
¢
or 4
after selecting the folder.
27
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
27
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
Selecting a folder and a track
using the name lists
Selecting a track and start playback
1
The following operations are only possible
when playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
so that the folder name list of the
inserted disc appears on the
display.
The current playing folder
will be highlighted on the
display.
You can show the folder name and track name
lists on the display while playing a disc. Then,
select a folder or a track you want to start
playback with.
Selecting a folder and start playback
1
Current folder number
Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
so that the folder name list of the
inserted disc appears on the
display.
The current playing folder
will be highlighted on the
display.
2
Press ¢
or 4
to show the
track name list of the current folder.
The current playing track
will be highlighted on the
display.
Current folder number
Current track number
Notes:
• The display can shows only six names at a
time. You can show the other names on the
next lists by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
• If you press ¢
or 4
, the track name
list of the current playing folder appears.
Each time you press the button, the folder name
list and track name list appear alternately.
• Only folders with MP3 or WMA tracks will be
listed.
2
Select the number (1 – 6) for the folder
you want to play.
Each time you press the button, the folder
name list and track name list appear
alternately.
Note:
The display can shows only six names at a time.
You can show the other names on the next lists
by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
3
Select the number (1 – 6) for the
track you want to play.
28
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
28
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
To play back tracks repeatedly
(Repeat Play)
To play back tracks at random
(Random Play)
You can play back the current track (or a folder
for MP3 and WMA discs) repeatedly.
You can play back all tracks on the disc (or a
folder for MP3 and WMA discs) at random.
1 Press M MODE while playing a CD.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
1 Press M MODE while playing a CD.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
ENGLISH
Selecting the playback modes
2 Press number button 2 repeatedly while
“Mode” is still on the display.
2 Press number button 3 repeatedly while
“Mode” is still on the display.
Each time you press the button, repeat play
mode changes as follows:
Each time you press the button, random play
mode changes as follows:
For audio CD and CD Text discs:
For audio CD and CD Text discs:
For MP3 and WMA discs:
For MP3 and WMA discs:
Mode
Mode
Random
Folder*
Random
Disc
Active
indicator
(folder random)
indicator lights
up.
Active
indicator
Plays repeatedly
Plays at random
Repeat
Track
The current (or
specified) track.
All tracks of the
current folder, then
tracks of the next
folder and so on.
(track
repeat) indicator
lights up.
Repeat
Folder*
(folder
repeat) indicator
lights up.
All tracks of the
current (or
specified) folder of
the disc.
(disc
All tracks on the
random) indicator disc.
lights up.
* “Random Folder” can be used for MP3 and WMA
discs only.
To cancel random play, select “Random Off” by
pressing number button 3 repeatedly or press
number button 4 in step 2.
* “Repeat Folder” can be used for MP3 and WMA
discs only.
To cancel repeat play, select “Repeat Off” by
pressing number button 2 repeatedly or press
number button 4 in step 2.
29
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
29
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
To play back only intros
(Intro Scan)
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can play back the first 15 seconds of each
track sequentially.
You can prohibit disc ejection and can lock a disc
in the loading slot.
1 Press M MODE while playing a CD.
While pressing SEL (select), press and
hold 0 (eject) for more than 2 seconds.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 1 repeatedly while
“Mode” is still on the display.
Each time you press the button, intro scan
mode changes as follows:
“No Eject” flashes on the display for about
5 seconds, and the disc is locked and cannot be
ejected.
If you press 0 (eject) again, the control panel
moves down but the disc is not ejected. “No
Eject” flashes on the display.
For audio CD and CD Text discs:
To cancel the prohibition and unlock the
disc
For MP3 and WMA discs:
Mode
Intro
Track
Active
indicator
While pressing SEL (select), press and hold
0 (eject) again for more than 2 seconds.
“Eject OK” flashes on the display for about
5 seconds, and the disc is unlocked.
Plays the beginnings
(15 seconds) of
(track All tracks on the
intro) indicator disc.
lights up.
Intro
Folder* (folder intro)
indicator lights
up.
The first track of every
folder of the disc.
* “Intro Folder” can be used for MP3 and WMA
discs only.
To cancel intro scan, select “Intro Off” by
pressing number button 1 repeatedly or press
number button 4 in step 2.
30
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
30
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
By pressing D DISP, you can change the information shown on the display.
If the information cannot be shown at a time, it will scroll on the display. See also “To
select the scroll mode for disc information and the DAB text—Scroll” on page 48.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown (will be blanked or substituted) on the
display.
Each time you press the button, the display patterns change as follows:
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text disc:
ENGLISH
Changing the display pattern
While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc when
“Tag” is set to “Off”:
Clock time
Clock time
Current track
number
Notes:
• When the disc title/performer is shown, the
(disc) indicator lights up. When the track title is
(track) indicator lights up.
shown, the
• If no name is assigned to the audio CD, “NO
NAME” will appear. To assign a name to an audio
CD, see page 53.
• If no disc title/performer or no track title is
recorded for the CD Text, “NO NAME” will appear.
Track name
Notes:
• When the folder name is shown, the
(folder)
indicator lights up. When the track name is shown,
the
(track) indicator lights up.
• If “Tag” is set to “On” (see pages 48 and 49), ID3
tag information will appear on the display if the
disc has an ID3 tag.
The album name/performer with
(disc)
indicator appear on the display instead of the folder
name; while track title with
(track) indicator
appear instead of the track name.
31
EN23-31_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
31
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
SOUND ADJUSTMENTS
2
Adjusting the sound
You can set the speaker output balance,
subwoofer output level, and input level of each
source.
• There is a time limit in doing the following
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you
finish, start from step 1 again.
1
Make adjustments.
• To adjust fader and balance—Fad, Bal:
You can make these two adjustments at
the same time.
• If you are using a two-speaker system,
set the fader level to “00.”
• Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
to adjust the fader.
• Press ¢
or 4
to adjust the balance.
Select the item you want to adjust.
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
Each time you press the
button, the adjustable items
change as follows:
• To adjust subwoofer output—Sub Out:
This takes effect only when a subwoofer is
connected.
To increase the level
• For iEQ (sound mode) settings,
see pages 33 – 35.
• For THEME (display theme) settings,
see page 36.
Indication
Fad
Bal
To do:
To decrease the level
Range
Adjust the front
R06 (Rear only)
and rear speaker
|
balance.
F06 (Front only)
Adjust the left
L06 (Left only)
and right speaker
|
balance.
R06 (Right only)
Sub Out
Adjust the
00 (min.)
subwoofer output
|
level and cutoff
12 (max.)
frequency level.
Low/Mid/High
Vol Adj
Adjust and store
the input level
of each source.
–12 (min.)
|
+12 (max.)
You can also set an appropriate cutoff
frequency level according to the subwoofer
connected.
• Press ¢
or 4
“Mid,” or “High.”
Low:
Frequencies higher than 50 Hz are
cut off to the subwoofer.
Mid: Frequencies higher than 80 Hz are
cut off to the subwoofer.
High: Frequencies higher than 115 Hz are
cut off to the subwoofer.
32
EN32-36_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
32
to select “Low,”
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
Adjust the input level to match it to the FM
sound level.
• You cannot make an adjustment if the
source is FM. “FIX” will appear.
Selecting preset sound modes
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
You can select a preset sound mode (iEQ:
intelligent equalizer) suitable to the music genre.
ENGLISH
• To adjust the input level of each source
—Vol Adj:
You can separately store this setting for
each source except FM. Before making an
adjustment, select an appropriate source
for which you want to make an
adjustment.
Once you have adjusted it, it is memorized,
and you will not need to adjust the volume
level each time you change the source.
• There is a time limit in doing the following
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you
finish, start from step 1 again.
Available sound modes:
FLAT (No sound mode is applied)
H.ROCK (Hard Rock)
R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
POP (Popular music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
DANCE (Dance music)
Country (Country music)
REGGAE (Reggae)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
USER 1, USER 2, USER 3
To increase the level
To decrease the level
1
Press SEL (select) once.
The last selected sound
mode is called up.
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
Ex.: If you have selected “Flat” previously
Each time you press the button, the
adjustable items change as follows:
• For SEL (basic sound) settings,
see pages 32 – 33.
• For THEME (display theme) settings,
see page 36.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
33
EN32-36_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
33
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
2
To cancel the sound mode, select “FLAT” in
step 2.
Press the number button to select
the sound mode you want.
• This unit has two sound mode selection
screens. To move to the other screen,
press 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
Notes:
• You can adjust the preset sound modes temporarily.
However, your temporary adjustments will be reset
when you select another sound mode.
• For details about the preset settings of each sound
mode, see table below.
To exit from the sound mode selection
screen, press SEL (select) repeatedly or wait for
about 5 seconds.
Press 5 (up) or
∞ (down).
Sound modes (preset frequency level settings)
The list below shows the preset frequency level settings for each sound mode.
Sound
Mode
Preset equalizing values
60 Hz
150 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
2.4 kHz
6 kHz
12 kHz
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Hard Rock
+03
+03
+01
00
00
+02
+01
R&B
+03
+02
+02
00
+01
+01
+03
+02
Flat
Pop
00
+02
00
00
+01
+01
Jazz
+03
+02
+01
+01
+01
+03
+02
Dance Music
+04
+02
00
–02
–01
+01
+01
Country
+02
+01
00
00
00
+01
+02
Reggae
+03
00
00
+01
+02
+02
+03
Classic
+02
+03
+01
00
00
+02
00
User 1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
User 2
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
User 3
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
34
EN32-36_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
34
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
4
Make adjustments as you like.
You can adjust the sound modes to your
preference and store your own adjustments in
memory (USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3).
1) Press ¢
or 4
to select the
frequency band—60Hz, 150Hz, 400Hz,
1kHz, 2.4kHz, 6kHz, 12kHz.
2) Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to adjust the
level of the selected band within the
range of –05 to +05.
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) to adjust the
other frequency bands.
• There is a time limit in doing the following
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you
finish, start from step 1 again.
1
Press SEL (select) once.
The last selected sound
mode is called up.
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
ENGLISH
Storing your own sound modes
5
Store the adjustment you made.
The confirmation message
appears—whether you want
to store the adjustment.
Ex.: If you have selected “Country” previously
2
Select the sound mode you want to
adjust.
If you want to cancel the adjustments,
press D DISP.
6
• This unit has two sound mode selection
screens. To move to the other screen,
press 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
3
Select one of the user sound modes
(USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3) you
want to store into.
Enter the sound adjustment mode.
The following sound
mode adjustment
screen appears on the
display.
Ex.: When you select “User 1”
35
EN32-36_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
35
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
Selecting the display theme
You can select the theme of the display during
playback.
View 1:
A scenery display appears.
• Positive pattern display:
• There is a time limit in doing the following
procedure. If the setting is canceled before you
finish, start from step 1 again.
1
• Negative pattern display:
Select “THEME”.
Each time you press the
button, the adjustable items
change as follows:
View 2:
A scenery display appears.
• Positive pattern display:
The last selected theme appears on the
display.
The next-step-operation button starts flashing.
• For SEL (basic sound) settings,
see pages 32 – 33.
• For iEQ (sound mode) settings,
see pages 33 – 35.
2
Select the display theme you want.
As you turn the control dial,
the themes change as
follows:
• Negative pattern display:
Meter:
The left and right audio level meters appear.
• If the small animation display is selected, only
one audio level meter can be shown.
Shake:
The speaker on the display vibrates as input
audio level changes.
Note:
View 1 and View 2 have positive pattern display and
negative pattern display (see right column). Either
positive or negative pattern display is automatically
selected depending on the “LCD Type” setting (see
page 48).
Off:
Cancels the display theme.
36
EN32-36_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
36
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
GRAPHIC DISPLAYS
ENGLISH
With the supplied Image Converter CD-ROM,
you can edit your own favorite pictures and use
them as the opening screen, ending screen, and
graphic screen while playing a source.
What is Image Converter?
Image Converter is a JVC’s original software to produce customize images to be shown on your
JVC Car Audio.
Here is a basic procedure to make a CD-R including still images (pictures) and animations
(movies) using Image Converter
In this manual, we only explain how to export the files (still images and animations) into the built-in
memory of this unit—step 5 below.
• For the other processes (from steps 1 to 4 below), refer to Image Converter’s Operation Guide
(PDF files included in the “Manual” folder of the supplied CD-ROM).
Install / Start the program
Install Image Converter on your PC.
Import the images
Import the source images from the Image Converter CD-ROM or from other equipment like
a digital camera or a digital video camera.
Retouch and edit the images
Retouch the images like trimming or adjusting color, editing the animation effect, and adding
the texts.
Write your images onto a CD-R
Write the animations or the still images you made with Image Converter using your CD-R
writing software.
You have to write the images you made onto a CD-R to enjoy the images on your Car Audio.
• To write data onto a CD-R, refer also to the instruction of your CD-R writing software.
Enjoy the animations or the still images you made on your Car Audio
Export the images to your JVC Car Audio from the CD-R you made.
37
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
37
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
Downloading images and
animations
Before starting the following procedure, prepare
a CD-R including still images (pictures) and
animations (movies).
• The supplied Image Converter CD-ROM
includes sample images and animations, so
you can use this disc for your first trial.
IMPORTANT:
• Still images (pictures) should have <jml>, and
animations (movies) should have <jma> as
their extension code in their file names.
• Downloading a file can be done only while
selecting “CD” as the source; on the other
hand, deleting a file can be done while
selecting any source.
• Before you download or erase the files,
observe the following:
– Do not download a file while driving.
– Do not turn off the ignition key of the car
while downloading or erasing a file.*
– Do not detach the control panel while
downloading or erasing a file.*
* If you do it, the file download and erasure will
not be done correctly. In this case, perform
the same procedure again.
• If you have already downloaded an
animation for “Opening,” “Ending,” or
“Movie,” downloading a new animation
deletes the previously stored animation.
• It takes a long time for the unit to download
an animation.
– About 6 to 7 seconds for a still image
(one frame).
– About 3 to 4 minutes for an animation of
30 frames.
– About 10 minutes for an animation of 90
frames.
• While a station (or service for the DAB tuner)
is being tuned in by one of the Standby
Reception modes such as TA or PTY, you
cannot download or delete a file. On the
other hand, while you are downloading or
deleting a file, Standby Reception mode will
not work to have this unit tune in a station
(or service). It only works after download or
deletion is over.
1
2
Open the control panel.
Insert a CD-R with the files (images
and animations you made with
Image Converter) into the loading
slot.
The unit draws the
disc, the control panel
goes back to the
previous position (see
page 54).
• If the disc includes playable audio files
such as MP3 tracks, playback starts
automatically.
3
Press M MODE after the disc is
detected.
“Mode” appears on the
display. The next-stepoperation buttons start
flashing.
4
Press number button 6 to show the
download selection screen.
38
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
38
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
Select (highlight) one of the listed
items for which you want to
download a file.
6
“File Check....” appears for a
while, then the folder list*
appears.
• Opening : Opening screen
To download an animation to be shown
after the unit is turned on. (You can store
only one animation consisting of a
maximum of 30 frames.)
The currently selected folder will be
highlighted on the display.
* You can assign your own names when editing a
CD-R.
• Ending : Ending screen
To download an animation to be shown
before the unit is turned off. (You can store
only one animation consisting of a
maximum of 30 frames.)
Notes:
• On this list, the folders including the target
files—<jml> files for “Picture” and <jma>
files for the others—are shown.
• The display can show only six names at a time.
You can show the other names on the next lists
by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
• If a disc inserted does not include any <jml>
and <jma> files, beeps sound and you cannot
go to the next step.
• Picture : Graphic screen*
To download a still image to be shown if
no operation is done for about 20
seconds. (You can store 90 still images—
one frame each.)
• Movie : Graphic screen*
To download an animation to be shown if
no operation is done for about 20
seconds. (You can store only one
animation consisting of a maximum of 90
frames.)
* Graphic screen will appear only if the
“Graphics” setting is set to one of the
following—“UserMovie,” “UserSlide,” or
“UserPict.” (see page 48).
Show the name list of the folder
included in the inserted CD-R.
ENGLISH
5
If you want to cancel the procedure,
press D DISP.
7
Select (highlight) a folder in which a
file you want is included.
If you want to cancel the procedure,
press number button 5, the download
selection screen goes off.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
39
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
39
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
8
Show the name list of the files
included in the selected folder.
Each time you press
the button, the lists on
the display changes as
follows:
10 If it is OK, press number button 1 to
start downloading.
Downloading starts, and
“Downloading...” appears on
the display.
If it is over, the file name list
appears again.
If it is not OK, press number button 5, the
file selection screen appears again. Repeat
from step 8 again.
11 Repeat steps 8 to 10 if you are
Ex.: When you have selected “Picture” in
step 5
downloading files for “Picture” and
want to store more files.
12 Finish the download procedure.
Note:
The display can show only six names at a time.
You can show the other names on the next lists by
pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
9
Select (highlight) a file you want to
download.
The file name appears, and the unit will
ask you “Download OK?”
To download a file for another item listed on the
download selection screen, repeat from step 3
again.
Notes:
• If you try to store the 91st image for picture screen,
“Picture Full” appears and you cannot start
downloading. In this case, delete unwanted files
before downloading.
• If the total frame number of the downloaded
animations exceeds the following number, the
exceeding frames are ignored.
– For opening and ending screens: 30 frames
– For movie screen: 90 frames
40
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
40
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
• When “BACK” is shown on the display above
number button 5, you can go back to the
previous screen by pressing number button 5.
To delete all the stored files at a time
To delete the files stored for “Opening,”
“Ending,” “Picture (all stored images at a
time),” and “Movie”
1 Press M MODE while playing any source.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
ENGLISH
Deleting unwanted files
1 Press M MODE while playing any source.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 6 to show the download
selection screen.
2 Press number button 6 to show the download
selection screen.
3 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select (highlight)
one of the listed items.
3 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select (highlight)
all the listed items.
Appears when “Picture” is
selected (highlighted)
4 To delete the file stored in “Opening,”
“Ending,” and “Movie,” press number button
3.
4 Press number button 4.
The unit asks you “All File Delete
OK?”
The file name of the previously
stored animation appears, and
the unit asks you “Delete OK?”
To delete all the files stored in “Picture” at
a time, press number button 4.
The unit asks you “All Picture
Delete OK?”
5 Press number button 4 again.
“Now Deleting...” appears while
erasing the files. When erasure is
over, the download selection
screen appears again.
6 Press number button 5 to resume the source
indication screen.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
41
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
41
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
5 To delete the file stored in “Opening,”
4 Press number button 3.
“Ending,” and “Movie,” press number button
3 again.
To delete all the files stored in “Picture” at
a time, press number button 4 again.
“Now Deleting...” appears while
erasing all the stored files. When
erasure is over, the download
selection screen appears again.
The unit shows the name list of the
stored files.
Note:
The display can show only six names at a time. You
can show the other names by pressing 5 (up) or
∞ (down) repeatedly.
5 Press the number buttons for the file you want
to delete.
6 Press number button 5 to resume the source
indication screen.
Selected file name appears, and the unit asks
you “Delete OK?”
6 Press number button 3 to start erasure.
“Now Deleting...” appears while
erasing the selected file. When
erasure is over, the name list of
the stored file appears again.
To delete the stored files for “Picture”
(one by one)
1 Press M MODE while playing any source.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 6 to show the download
7 To delete more files, repeat from steps 5 and 6.
8 Press D DISP to resume the source indication
screen.
selection screen.
3 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select (highlight)
“Picture.”
42
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
42
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
3
Select “Opening” (opening screen
setting) or “Ending” (ending screen
setting).
Activating the animations stored for
opening and ending screens
After the unit turns on or before the unit turns off,
you can see preset animations on the display.
These are called opening screen and ending
screen. You can use your own edited animations
for these opening and ending screens.
• Before performing the following procedure,
make sure that “KeyIn CFM” is set to “On”;
otherwise, the animations may not be shown.
(See page 48.)
• If no animation is stored in “Opening” and
“Ending,” “Opening” and “Ending” cannot be
selected as a PSM item.
1
Ex.: When you select “Opening”
4
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
Press number button 1 to select
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the
PSM settings.
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on
the display.
Select “User.”
• Default: Factory-preset animation is used.
• User: Your own edited animation is used.
5
2
ENGLISH
Activating the downloaded
images and animations
Finish the setting.
Activating the graphic screen using
either picture or movie
Using this setting, you can change the graphic
displays. These graphic screens appear if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds.
• If no image is stored in “Picture,” or no
animation in “Movie,” “UserPict.,” “UserMovie”
and “UserSlide” cannot be selected for the
“Graphics” setting.
1
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
43
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
43
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
2
Press number button 1 to select
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the
PSM settings.
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on
the display.
Selecting a still image for graphic
display—User Picture
You cannot select “UserPict.” as a PSM item in
the following cases:
• If no image is stored in “Picture,” or
• “UserPict.” is not selected for the “Graphics”
setting (see the left column).
1
3
Select “UserMovie,” “UserSlide,” or
“UserPict.”
2
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
Press number button 1 to select
“MOVIE”—Movie category of the
PSM settings.
The “Graphics” setting screen appears on
the display.
Ex.: When you select
“UserPict.”
• UserMovie: Your edited animation stored
in “Movie” is activated as your
graphic screen.
• UserSlide: Your edited still images stored
in “Picture” are activated and
shown in sequence as your
graphic screen.
• UserPict.: One of your edited still image
stored in “Picture” is activated
as your graphic screen.
Select one of the stored
images (see the next
column).
4
3
Select “UserPict.”
File name of the
current selected
image also appears.
Finish the setting.
4
Select a file you want.
5
Finish the setting.
To cancel all graphic displays, select “Off” in
step 3.
Note:
For the “Graphics” setting, you can also select “Int
Demo,” “All Demo,” and “ImageLink.”
– See pages 8 and 48 for “Int Demo” and “All Demo.”
– See pages 25 and 48 for “ImageLink.”
44
EN37-44_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
44
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
Changing the general settings
(PSM)
3
Select the PSM item you want to
adjust.
You can change the items listed on the table on
pages 46 and 47 by using the PSM (Preferred
Setting Mode) control.
• The PSM items are grouped into six
categories—MOVIE, CLOCK, DISP (display),
TUNER, AUDIO, and COLOR.
Basic Procedure
• By pressing ¢
or 4
repeatedly, you can also move to another
category.
Ex.: To change “Contrast”
1
ENGLISH
OTHER MAIN FUNCTIONS
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(See pages 46 and 47.)
4
Adjust the PSM item selected.
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
Ex.: If you have selected “Graphics”
previously
2
Press number button (in this
example, 3) to select one of the PSM
categories.
5
6
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust the
other PSM items if necessary.
Finish the setting.
The first-listed item in the selected category
appears.
45
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
45
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
ENGLISH
Preferred Setting Mode (PSM) items
The PSM items are grouped into six categories—MOVIE, CLOCK, DISP (display), TUNER, AUDIO,
and COLOR.
CLOCK
MOVIE
Indications
Selectable values/items
Factory-preset
settings
See
page
See page 48 for details
Int Demo
8, 25, 48
Graphics
Movie demonstration
KeyIn CFM
Key-in confirmation
On
Off
On
48
Opening*1
Opening animation
Default
User
Default
43
Ending*1
Ending animation
Default
User
Default
43
UserPict.*2
User Picture
From the stored files
First stored
44
Clock Hr
Hour adjustment
0 – 23 (1 – 12)
0 (0:00)
9
Clock Min
Minute adjustment
00 – 59
00 (0:00)
9
24H/12H
24 hours or 12 hours
Auto Adj
Automatic clock
adjustment
Scroll
Scroll mode
12Hours
24Hours
24Hours
9
Off
On
On
21
Once
48
Auto
50
Any time – Any time
18 – 7
50
1 – 10
5
48
Auto
48
Once
Auto
Off
DISP (display)
Dimmer
Dimmer mode
From– To*3
Dimmer time setting
Contrast
Contrast
LCD Type
Display type
Auto
Off
Time Set
On
Negative
Positive
Auto
Font Type
Font type
1
2
1
48
Tag
Tag display
Off
On
On
48, 49
*1 Displayed only after a downloadable file is stored in memory.
*2 Displayed only after a downloadable file is stored in memory and while selecting “UserPict.” for “Graphics.”
*3 Displayed only when “Dimmer” is set to “Time Set.”
46
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
46
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
PTY Stnby
PTY Standby
AF-Regn’l
Alternate frequency/
Regionalization
reception
AUDIO
TUNER
TA Volume
Traffic
announcement
volume
P-Search
Programme search
IF Filter
Intermediate
frequency
filter
DAB AF*6
Alternative frequency
search
Announce*6
Announcement
standby
Beep
Key-touch tone
Ext Input*7
Telephone
Selectable values/items
Factory-preset
settings
See
page
29 programme types
(see page 22)
News
18
AF
16, 17
Volume 20
21
AF
AF Reg
Off*
4
Volume 0 – Volume 30 or 50*5
Off
On
Off
20
Wide
Auto
Auto
49
Off
On
On
69
Travel
68
9 announcement types
(see page 68)
Off
On
On
49
External component
Changer
Line In
Changer
49
Telephone Muting
Off
Off
49
HighPower
49
Every
51
Day
52
Muting1
Muting2
Amp.Gain
Amplifier gain control
All SRC
Selected source
COLOR
User
HighPower
LowPower
See page 51 for details
Day
Night
R
Red
00 – 11
Day: 07/Night: 05
52
G
Green
00 – 11
Day: 07/Night: 05
52
B
Blue
00 – 11
Day: 07/Night: 05
52
On
49
SlotLight
*4
*5
*6
*7
User color selection
On
Slot lights
ENGLISH
Indications
Off
Displayed only when “DAB AF” is set to “Off.”
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 49 for details.)
Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.
Not displayed when the current source is “CD-CH” or “LINE IN.”
47
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
47
4/2/04, 5:54 PM
ENGLISH
To show the graphics on the display
—Graphics
You can change the graphics shown on the display.
These graphics appear if no operation is done for
about 20 seconds (except for “ImageLink”).
• Int Demo:
Display demonstration (animation)
and playback source indication
appears alternately (see page 8).
• All Demo: Display demonstration (animation)
appears (see page 8).
• UserMovie: Your edited animation appears
(see pages 43 and 44).
• UserSlide: Your edited still images appears in
sequence (see pages 43 and 44).
• UserPict.: One of your edited still image
appears (see pages 43 and 44).
• ImageLink: To show a still image while playing
back an MP3/WMA track (see
page 25).
• Off:
Cancels all graphic display above.
Note:
You can select “UserMovie,” “UserSlide,” and
“UserPict.” only after downloading the appropriate
files in memory. (See pages 43.)
To turn the source animation on the
display on or off—KeyIn CFM
When changing the source, the display shows
the source animation. You can turn on or off the
source animation on the display.
• On:
• Off:
Turns on the source animation.
Cancels the source animation.
To select the scroll mode for disc
information and the DAB text—Scroll
You can select the scroll mode for disc
information and for the DAB radio text (DLS:
Dynamic Label Segment).
• Once:
• Auto:
While showing the disc information:
scrolls the disc information only once.
While showing the DAB text: scrolls
the detailed DAB text.
While showing the disc information:
repeats the scroll (in 5-second
intervals).
While showing the DAB text: scrolls
the detailed DAB text.
• Off:
While showing the disc information:
cancels scroll mode.
While showing the DAB text: shows
only headline if any.
To adjust the display contrast level
—Contrast
Adjust the display contrast (1 – 10) to make the
display indications clear and legible.
To select the display illumination pattern
—LCD Type
You can select the display illumination patterns
according to your preference.
• Auto:
Positive pattern will be selected
during the day time (depending on
the “Dimmer” setting); on the other
hand, negative pattern will be used
during the night time (depending on
the “Dimmer” setting).
• Positive: Positive (normal) pattern of the
display.
• Negative: Negative pattern of the display.
To select the font on the display—Font Type
You can change the font types used on the
display. Select either “1” or “2” according to your
preference.
To turn the tag display on or off—Tag
An MP3/WMA track can contain track information
called “ID3 Tag” where its album name,
performer, track title, etc. are recorded.
There are two versions–ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1)
and ID3v2 (ID3 Tag version 2). If both ID3v1 and
ID3v2 are recorded on a disc, ID3v2 information
will be shown.
• On:
Turns on the ID3 tag display while
playing MP3/WMA tracks.
• If an MP3/WMA track does not
have ID3 tags, folder name and
track name appear.
48
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
48
4/2/04, 5:29 PM
• Off:
To select the telephone muting—Telephone
Turns off the ID3 tag display while
playing MP3/WMA tracks. (Only the
folder name and track name can be
shown.)
• Muting1: Selects this if this setting can mute
the sounds while using the cellular
phone.
• Muting2: Selects this if this setting can mute
the sounds while using the cellular
phone.
• Off:
Cancels the telephone muting.
To change the FM tuner selectivity
—IF Filter
In some areas, adjacent stations may interfere
with each other. If this interference occurs, noise
may be heard.
• Auto:
• Wide:
When this type of interference
occurs, this unit automatically
increases the tuner selectivity so that
interference noise will be reduced.
(But the stereo effect will also be
lost.)
Subject to the interference from
adjacent stations, but sound quality
will not be degraded and the stereo
effect will not be lost.
This mode is used when a cellular phone system
is connected. Depending on the phone system
used, select either “Muting1” or “Muting2,”
whichever mutes the sounds from this unit.
To select the amplifier gain control
—Amp.Gain
You can change the maximum volume level of
this unit. When the maximum power of the
speakers is less than 50 W, select “LowPower” to
prevent them from being damaged.
• LowPower: You can adjust the volume level
from “Volume 00” to “Volume 30.”
Note:
If you change the setting from
“HighPower” to “LowPower” while
listening at a volume level more than
30, the unit automatically changes the
volume level to “Volume 30.”
To turn the key-touch tone on or off—Beep
You can deactivate the key-touch tone if you do
not want it to beep each time you press a button.
• On:
• Off:
Activates the key-touch tone.
Deactivates the key-touch tone.
• HighPower: You can adjust the volume level
from “Volume 00” to “Volume 50.”
To turn the slot light on or off—SlotLight
To select the external component to use
—Ext Input
You can turn off the slot light if you do not want
the illumination each time you insert/eject the
disc or when you change the control panel angle.
You can connect the external component to the
CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied).
To use the external component as the playback
source through this unit, you need to select
which component—CD changer or external
component—to use.
• On:
• Off:
• Changer:
• Line In:
ENGLISH
Note:
If you change the setting from “Off” to
“On” while playing an MP3/WMA
track, the tag display will be activated
when the next track starts playing.
Activates the illumination.
Deactivates the illumination.
To use the CD changer.
To use the external component
other than CD changer.
Note:
For connecting the Line Input Adapter KS-U57 and
the external component, refer to the Installation/
Connection Manual (separate volume).
49
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
49
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
ENGLISH
Selecting the dimmer mode
4
Set the dimmer mode as you like.
You can dim the display at night automatically or
as you set the timer.
Note:
Auto Dimmer equipped for this unit may not work
correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those
having a control dial for dimming.
In this case, select any other than “Auto.”
1
• Auto:
Activates Auto Dimmer.
When you turn on the car
head lights, the display
automatically dims.
• Off:
Cancels Auto Dimmer.
• On:
Always dims the display.
• Time Set: Used to set the timer for the
dimmer mode.
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(See pages 46 and 47.)
Note:
Selecting “Auto” or “Time Set” may change the
display pattern to the “Negative” or “Positive”
pattern if “LCD Type” is set to “Auto.”
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
2
Press number button 3 to select
“DISP”—Display category of the
PSM settings.
• If you select “Time Set,” go to the following
steps to set the timer.
• If you select any other than “Time Set,” go
to step 7 to finish the setting.
5
3
Press ¢
“Dimmer.”
or 4
Select “From– To” to set the timer for
the dimmer mode.
to select
6
Set the timer.
1 Turn the control dial to select the start
time.
2 Press ¢
once.
3 Turn the control dial to select the end
time.
7
Finish the setting.
50
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
50
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
3
Select the source that you want to
set the display color for.
You can set the display color using the PSM
control. You can select your favorite color for
each source (or for all sources).
You can also create your own colors, and set
them as the display color.
ENGLISH
Changing the display color
Setting the desired color for each source
Once you have set the color for each source (or
for all sources), the display illuminates in the
selected color when the source is selected.
1
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(See pages 46 and 47.)
*1 When you select “All SRC,” you can use the
same color for all the sources.
*2 Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.
4
As you turn the control
dial, the colors change
as follows:
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
2
Select the display color.
Press number button 6 to select
“COLOR”—Color category of the
PSM settings.
Every*1 O Aqua O Sky O Sea O
Leaves O Grass O Apple O Rose O
Amber O Honey O Violet O Grape O
Pale O User*2 O (back to the
beginning)
*1 When you select “Every,” the color changes
every 2 seconds (changing to every color
listed above except “User”).
*2 When you select “User,” the user-edited
colors—“Day” and “Night” will be applied.
(See page 52.)
5
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the
color for each source (except when
selecting “All SRC” in step 3).
Finish the setting.
51
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
51
4/2/04, 6:00 PM
ENGLISH
Creating your own color—User
4
You can create your own colors—“Day” and
“Night,” and select them as the display color for
any desired source.
• Day:
Can be used as your user color during
the day time*.
• Night: Can be used as your user color during
the night time*.
* Depends on the “Dimmer” setting. (See page 50.)
1
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(See pages 46 and 47.)
The next-step-operation
buttons start flashing.
2
Select the user color adjustment
screen.
One of the user color
adjustment screens
appears.
“User Day” or “User
Night” is shown on the
left side of the display.
5
Select “Day” or “Night” which you
want to make an adjustment for.
Press number button 6 to select
“COLOR”—Color category of the
PSM settings.
6
Adjust the selected user color.
1) Press ¢
or 4
to select
one of three primary colors—“R”
(red), “G” (green), and “B” (blue).
3
Select “User” as a color.
The user color will be
applied to the currently
selected source (the one
shown on the upper
portion of the display. In
this example “All SRC”).
To select which source to apply your user
color to, select the target source first by
pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down), before
selecting “User” in this step.
2) Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to
adjust the selected primary color.
You can adjust within the range of 00 to
11.
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) to adjust
the other primary colors.
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust the
other user colors—“Day” or “Night.”
Finish the setting.
52
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
52
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
You can assign names to CDs (both in this unit
and in the CD changer) and the external
component (LINE IN).
After assigning a name, it will appears on the
display when you select the source.
ENGLISH
Assigning names to the sources
4
Maximum number of
characters
Sources
CDs/CD-CH*
Up to 32 characters (up
to 40 discs)
External component
(LINE IN)
Up to 8 characters
Select a character.
• About the available
characters, see page
73.
5
Move the cursor to the next
(or previous) character position.
* You cannot assign a name to a CD Text or an MP3/
WMA disc.
1
Select a source you want to assign a
name to.
6
7
Repeat steps 3 to 5 until you finish
entering the name.
Finish the procedure while the last
selected character is flashing.
When you select a source, the power
automatically comes on.
2
While pressing D DISP, press and
hold SEL (select) for more than
2 seconds.
The next-step-operation buttons start
flashing.
Ex.: When you select CD as the source
3
To erase the entered characters
To erase all the characters at a time, press and
hold D DISP for more than 1 second as
described in the procedure above.
Notes:
• When you try to assign a name to the 41st disc,
“Name Full” appears and you cannot enter the text
entry mode. In this case, delete unwanted names
before assignment.
• When the CD changer is connected, you can assign
names to CDs in the CD changer. These names can
also be shown on the display if you insert the CDs
in this unit.
Select the character set you want
while the first character position is
flashing.
Each time you press the
button, the character set
changes as follows:
53
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
53
6/2/04, 9:18 AM
ENGLISH
Changing the control panel
angle
2
Press
(angle) repeatedly to adjust
the angle to the position you want.
You can change the angle of the control panel to
four positions.
1
Press and hold
(angle) until the
angle adjustment screen appears.
Time countdown indicator
Notes:
• If you turn the power off, the control panel
automatically returns to the closed position. Next
time you turn on the power, the control panel moves
to its previous position.
(angle) while downloading an
• Do not press
animation or a picture; otherwise downloading will
fail.
• When the unit reads a disc information, you cannot
change the control panel angle.
CAUTION:
There is a time limit in doing the following
procedure. While time countdown indicator
appears, do the following procedure.
NEVER insert your
finger in between the
control panel and the
unit, as it may get
caught or hurt.
The control panel angles changes as follows:
54
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
54
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
You can detach the control panel when leaving
the car.
When detaching or attaching the control panel,
be careful not to damage the connectors on the
back of the control panel and on the panel
holder.
Attaching the control panel
1
Insert the left side of the control
panel into the groove on the panel
holder.
ENGLISH
Detaching the control panel
Detaching the control panel
Before detaching the control panel, be sure to
turn off the power.
1
2
Unlock the control panel.
2
Press the right side of the control
panel to fix it to the panel holder.
Lift and pull the control panel out of
the unit.
Note on cleaning the connectors:
If you frequently detach the control panel, the
connectors will deteriorate.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened
with alcohol, being careful not to damage the
connectors.
3
Put the detached control panel into
the provided case.
Connectors
55
EN45-55_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
55
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
ENGLISH
CD CHANGER OPERATIONS
We recommend that you use the JVC MP3compatible CD changer with your unit.
Playing discs
By using this CD changer, you can play back
your original CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs
(Rewritable) recorded either in audio CD format
or in MP3 format.
• You can also connect other CH-X series
CD changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).
However, they are not compatible with MP3
discs, so you cannot play back MP3 discs.
• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD
changers with this unit.
Select the CD changer (CD-CH).
Before operating your CD changer:
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with
your CD changer.
• If no discs are in the magazine of the CD
changer or the discs are inserted upside
down, “No Disc” will flash on the display. If
this happens, remove the magazine and set
the discs correctly.
• If no magazine is loaded in the CD changer,
“No Magazine” flashes on the display. If this
happens, insert the magazine in the CD
changer.
• If “Reset 01” – “Reset 08” flashes on the
display, something is wrong with the
connection between this unit and the CD
changer. If this happens, check the
connection and make sure the cords are
connected firmly. Then, press the reset
button of the CD changer.
Note:
You cannot control and play any WMA disc on the CD
changer.
Each time you press the button,
the source changes as described
on page 7.
When you select a source, the
power automatically comes on.
• When the current disc is an MP3 disc:
Playback starts from the first folder of the
current disc once file check is completed.
Selected disc number
Current folder/track and
elapsed playing time
56
EN56-61_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
56
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
MP3 indicator
Selected disc number
To go to a particular disc directly
Press the number button corresponding to the
disc number to start its playback (while the CD
changer is playing).
ENGLISH
• When the current disc is a CD:
Playback starts from the first track of the
current disc.
• To select a disc number from 01 – 06:
Press 1 (7) – 6 (12) briefly.
• To select a disc number from 07 – 12:
Press and hold 1 (7) – 6 (12) for more than
one second.
Current track and elapsed playing time
Notes:
• When you press CD/CD-CH, the power
automatically comes on. You do not have to press
to turn on the power.
• If you change the source, CD changer play also
stops. Next time you select “CD-CH” as the source,
disc play starts from where playback has been
stopped previously.
To change the display pattern
To fast-forward or reverse the track
Press and hold ¢
,
during play, to fast-forward
the track.
Press and hold 4
the track.
, during play, to reverse
Note:
During this operation on an MP3 disc, you can only
hear intermittent sounds. (The elapsed playing time
also changes intermittently on the display.)
By pressing D DISP, you can change the
information shown on the display.
Each time you press the button,
the display patterns change.
• For details, see page 31.
To go to the next or previous tracks
briefly during
Press ¢
play, to skip ahead to the
beginning of the next track.
Each time you press the
button consecutively, the
beginning of the next tracks
is located and played back.
briefly during play, to skip back to
Press 4
the beginning of the current track.
Each time you press the button consecutively,
the beginning of the previous tracks is located
and played back.
57
EN56-61_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
57
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
This operation is only possible when
using JVC MP3-compatible CD changer
(CH-X1500).
How to go to the desired track quickly
• Ex. 1: To select track number 32 while
playing track number 6
To go to a track quickly
1 Press M MODE while playing a disc.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
(Three times)
Track 6
\ 10 \ 20 \ 30
(Twice)
\ 31 \ 32
• Ex. 2 : To select track number 8 while
playing track number 36
See page 38 for this function.
Ex.: When the current disc is an MP3 disc
2 Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) while “Mode” is still
(Three times)
Track 36
\ 30 \ 20 \ 10
(Twice)
\9\8
on the display.
To skip 10 tracks* forwards to
the last track
To skip 10 tracks* backwards to
the first track
* First time you press 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
button, the track skips to the nearest higher
or lower track with a track number of multiple
ten (ex. 10th, 20th, 30th).
Then each time you press the button, you can
skip 10 tracks (see “How to go to the desired
track quickly” on the right column).
• After the last track, the first track will be
selected, and vice versa.
To skip to the next or previous folder
(only for MP3 discs)
Press 5 (up) while playing an
MP3 disc, to go to the next folder.
Each time you press the button
consecutively, the next folder is
located, and the first track in the
folder starts playback.
Press ∞ (down) while playing an MP3 disc, to go
to the previous folder.
Each time you press the button consecutively,
the previous folder is located, and the first track
in the folder starts playback.
Note:
If the current playing disc is an MP3 disc, tracks are
skipped within the same folder.
58
EN56-61_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
58
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
If you forget what discs are loaded in the CD
changer, you can show the disc name list and
select a disc in the list shown on the display.
• The display can show only six names at a time.
1
While playing a disc, press and hold
5 (up) or ∞ (down) until a disc name
list appears on the display.
While playing an MP3 disc, you can also show
the folder name list(s) and track name list(s) on
the display, then select a folder or track.
1 While playing an MP3 disc, press and hold
5 (up) or ∞ (down) until a disc name list
appears on the display.
ENGLISH
Selecting a disc/folder/track
using the name lists
2 Press ¢
or 4
to show a folder
name list of the current disc or track name list
of the current folder.
Each time you press the button, the lists on
the display change as follows:
Disc name list
Folder name list
Track name list
Current folder number
Ex.: When folder name list is selected
Selected disc number
Current track number
Note:
If a disc has a disc title (CD Text) or an assigned
disc name, it will be shown on the display.
However, if the disc has not been played before,
its disc number will appear.
2
Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to show
the other disc name list, if
necessary.
Ex.: When track name list is selected
Note:
The display can shows only six items at a time. You
can show the other names on the next lists by
pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
3 Press the number button for the disc, folder,
or track you want to play.
3
Select the number (1 – 6) for the disc
you want to play.
59
EN56-61_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
59
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
Selecting the playback modes
To play back tracks at random
(Random Play)
1 Press M MODE during play.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 3 repeatedly while
“Mode” is still on the display.
Note:
MP3 indicator also lights up if the current playing
disc is an MP3 disc.
To cancel random play, select “Random Off” by
pressing number button 3 repeatedly or press
number button 4 in step 2.
To play back tracks repeatedly
(Repeat Play)
1 Press M MODE during play.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 2 repeatedly while
“Mode” is still on the display.
Ex.: When you select “Random Disc” while
playing an MP3 disc
Each time you press the button, random play
mode changes as follows:
For MP3 discs:
Ex.: When you select “Repeat Track” while
playing an MP3 disc
For CDs:
Each time you press the button, repeat play
mode changes as follows:
For MP3 discs:
Mode
Random
Folder*
Random
Disc
Random
All
Active
indicator
Plays at random
All tracks of the
(folder random) current folder, then
indicator
tracks of the next
lights up.
folder and so on.
(disc random)
indicator lights
up.
(all random)
indicator lights
up.
For CDs:
All tracks of
the current (or
specified) disc.
All tracks of
all discs inserted in
the magazine.
* “Random Folder” is only applicable for MP3 disc.
60
EN56-61_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
60
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
Active
indicator
Plays repeatedly
Repeat
Track
(track
The current (or
repeat)
specified) track.
indicator lights up.
Repeat
Folder*
(folder
repeat) indicator
lights up.
All tracks of the
current (or
specified) folder of
the current disc.
Repeat
Disc
(disc
repeat) indicator
lights up.
All tracks of
the current (or
specified) disc.
* “Repeat Folder” is only applicable for MP3 disc.
Note:
MP3 indicator also lights up if the current playing
disc is an MP3 disc.
To cancel repeat play, select “Repeat Off” by
pressing number button 2 repeatedly or press
number button 4 in step 2.
To play back only intros (Intro Scan)
1 Press M MODE during play.
Each time you press the button, intro scan
mode changes as follows:
For MP3 discs:
ENGLISH
Mode
For CDs:
Mode
Intro
Track
Intro
Folder*
Intro
Disc
Active
indicator
(track intro)
indicator
lights up.
(folder intro)
indicator lights
up.
Plays the beginnings
(15 seconds) of
All tracks of the
current disc.
The first track of every
folder of the current
disc.
(disc The first tracks of
intro) indicator the inserted discs.
lights up.
* “Intro Folder” is only applicable for MP3 disc.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
Note:
MP3 indicator also lights up if the current playing
disc is an MP3 disc.
2 Press number button 1 repeatedly while
To cancel intro scan, select “Intro Off” by
pressing number button 1 repeatedly or press
number button 4 in step 2.
“Mode” is still on the display.
Ex.: When you select “Intro Track” while
playing an MP3 disc
61
EN56-61_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
61
30/1/04, 5:23 PM
ENGLISH
EXTERNAL COMPONENT OPERATIONS
Playing an external component
3
Adjust the volume.
You can connect the external component to the
CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input
Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied).
Preparations:
• For connecting the Line Input Adapter KS-U57 and
the external component, refer to the Installation/
Connection Manual (separate volume).
• Before operating the external component using the
following procedure, select the external input
correctly. See “To select the external component to
use—Ext Input” on page 49.
1
Select the external component
(LINE IN).
4
Adjust the sound as you want.
(See pages 32 – 35.)
Changing the display pattern
By pressing D DISP, you can change the
information shown on the display.
Each time you press the button,
the display patterns change as
follows:
• If “LINE IN” does not appear on the display,
see page 49 and select the external input
(“LINE IN”).
Note on One-Touch Operation:
When you press CD/CD-CH, the power automatically
comes on. You do not have to press
to turn
on the power.
2
Clock time
Turn on the connected component
and start playing the source.
62
EN62-62_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
62
6/2/04, 9:19 AM
ENGLISH
DAB TUNER OPERATIONS
We recommend that you use DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) tuner KT-DB1500 or KT-DB1000
with your unit.
If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your
DAB tuner.
What is DAB system?
DAB is one of the digital radio broadcasting
systems available today. It can deliver CD
quality sound without any annoying
interference and signal distortion.
Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and
data.
In contrast to FM broadcast, where each
programme is transmitted on its own
frequency, DAB combines several
programmes (called “services”) to form one
“ensemble.”
In addition, each “service”—called “primary
service”—can also be divided into its
components (called “secondary service”).
With the DAB tuner connected with this unit,
you can enjoy these DAB services.
Tuning in to an ensemble and
one of the services
A typical ensemble has 6 or more programmes
(services) broadcast at the same time. After
tuning in to an ensemble, you can select a
service you want to listen to.
Before you start....
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or
external component is the current source.
1
Select the DAB tuner.
Each time you press and
hold the button, the DAB
tuner and the FM/AM tuner
are alternately selected.
2
Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2,
or DAB3).
Each time you press the
button, the DAB band
changes as follows:
Note:
This receiver has three DAB bands (DAB1,
DAB2, DAB3). You can use any of them to tune
in to an ensemble.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
63
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
63
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
ENGLISH
3
Start searching for an ensemble.
To search for ensembles
of higher frequency
To search for ensembles of lower frequency
When an ensemble is received, searching
stops.
To stop searching before an ensemble is
received, press the same button you have
pressed for searching.
4
Select a service (either primary or
secondary) you want to listen to.
When surrounding noises interfere your
listening while driving
If this happens, especially when you are listening
at a low volume level, you can reinforce the
sounds to improve for your listening.
For this purpose, some service provides
Dynamic Range Control signals together with
their regular program signals.
1 Press M MODE while listening to a DAB
service.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 1 repeatedly to activate
the DRC function while “Mode” is still on the
display.
To select the next service
(If a primary service has
some secondary services,
they are selected before the
next primary service is
selected.)
To select the previous service (either
primary or secondary)
Each time you press the button, the DRC
function will be set as follows:
To tune in to a particular ensemble
without searching
Before you start....
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or
external component is the current source.
1 Press and hold FM/AM DAB to select the
2
3
4
5
DAB tuner as the source.
Press FM/AM DAB repeatedly to select the
DAB band (DAB1, DAB2, or DAB3).
Press and hold ¢
or 4
for more
than one second.
Press ¢
or 4
repeatedly until the
ensemble you want is reached.
• If you hold down the button, the frequency
keeps changing until you release the
button.
Press 5 (up) or ∞ (down) to select a service
(either primary or secondary) you want to
listen to.
As the number increases, the DRC effect level
also increases.
After about
5 seconds
DRC indicator appears.
64
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
64
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
4
Select a service of the ensemble you
want to listen to.
To select the next service
To cancel the DRC effect, select “DRC Off.”
ENGLISH
• The DRC indicator will be highlighted
(
) only when the unit received DRC
signals from the tuned service.
To select the previous service
To restore the FM/AM tuner
Press and hold FM/AM DAB again.
5
Storing DAB services in
memory
Press and hold the number button
(in this example, 1) you want to store
the selected service into for more
than 2 seconds.
You can preset up to 6 DAB services in each
DAB band (DAB1, DAB2, and DAB3) manually.
Before you start....
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or
external component is the current source.
1
Select the DAB tuner.
The display pattern automatically changes
to the non-animation display and the preset
number flashes (then the previous display
pattern resumes).
Each time you press and
hold the button, the DAB
tuner and the FM/AM tuner
are alternately selected.
6
2
Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2,
or DAB3).
Each time you press the
button, the DAB band
changes as follows:
3
Tune in to an ensemble you want.
Repeat the above procedure to store
other DAB services into other preset
numbers.
Notes:
• You can only preset primary DAB services. If you
store a secondary service, its primary service will
be stored instead.
• A previously preset DAB service is erased when a
new DAB service is stored in the same preset
number.
• Preset DAB services are erased when the power
supply to the memory circuit is interrupted (for
example, during battery replacement). If this
occurs, preset the DAB services again.
65
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
65
4/2/04, 5:38 PM
ENGLISH
Tuning in to a preset DAB
service
You can easily tune in to a preset DAB service.
Remember that you must store services first. If
you have not stored them yet, see “Storing DAB
services in memory” on page 65.
1
Each time you press and
hold the button, the DAB
tuner and the FM/AM tuner
are alternately selected.
2
Before you start....
Press FM/AM DAB briefly if CD, CD changer, or
external component is the current source.
1
Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2
or DAB3).
Each time you press the
button, the DAB band
changes as follows:
Select the DAB tuner.
Each time you press and
hold the button, the DAB
tuner and the FM/AM tuner
are alternately selected.
2
Select the DAB tuner.
3
Select the DAB band (DAB1, DAB2,
or DAB3).
Press and hold 5 (up) or ∞ (down)
until the preset service (primary
service) list for the current band
(DAB1, DAB2, or DAB3) appears on
the display.
Each time you press the
button, the DAB band
changes as follows:
3
Select the number (1 – 6) for the
preset DAB service (primary) you
want.
Ex.: When you select the preset service
(primary service) number 1 of the
DAB1 band
Note:
If the selected primary service has some secondary
services, pressing the same number button repeatedly
will tune in to the secondary services.
Note:
You can show the other DAB band preset service
(primary service) lists (DAB1, DAB2, or DAB3)
by pressing 5 (up) or ∞ (down).
4
Select the number (1 – 6) for a
service you want.
Selecting a preset service using the
preset service list
If you forget what services are stored in what
preset number, you can check the preset service
list, then select your desired service on the list.
66
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
66
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
With the DAB tuner connected, you can use the
following convenient functions.
• Road Traffic News Standby Reception (TA
Standby Reception)
• Standby Reception of 9 types of
Announcement signals
• PTY Standby Reception
• PTY search
• Tracing the same program (service)
automatically while driving where the same
DAB ensemble is not received
1
2
Press and hold SEL (select) for more
than 2 seconds so that one of the
PSM items appears on the display.
(PSM: see pages 46 and 47.)
ENGLISH
What you can do more with
DAB
Press number button 4 to select
“TUNER”—Tuner category of the
PSM settings.
The “PTY Stnby” (standby) setting screen
appears on the display.
Road Traffic News Standby Reception
(TA Standby Reception)
Road Traffic News Standby Reception (TA
Standby Reception) allows the unit to switch
temporarily to the traffic announcement from the
current source (another service, FM, CD, or other
connected components).
• Operations are exactly the same as explained
on pages 17 and 18 for FM RDS stations. You
cannot use Road Traffic News Standby
Reception (TA Standby Reception) separately
for the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.
3
Select “Announce” (announcement).
To use TA Standby Reception, see page 17.
To set the TA volume level, see page 21.
4
Using Announcement Standby
Reception
Selected announcement
type appears on the
display and is stored into
memory.
Announcement Standby Reception allows the
unit to switch temporarily to your favorite service
(Announcement type).
To select your favorite announcement type
for Announcement Standby Reception
Select one of the 9 announcement
types. (See page 68.)
5
Finish the setting.
When shipped from factory, Announcement
Standby Reception has been set to search for
“Travel” services.
You can select your favorite announcement type
for Announcement Standby Reception.
• If you do not want to change the announcement
type (from “Travel” to another one), go to page 68.
67
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
67
12/2/04, 11:14 AM
ENGLISH
To activate Announcement Standby
Reception
1 Press M MODE while listening to a DAB
service.
“Mode” appears on the display.
The next-step-operation buttons
start flashing.
2 Press number button 2 repeatedly to activate
Announcement Standby Reception while
“Mode” is still on the display.
Each time you press the button,
Announcement Standby Reception turns on
and off alternately.
• If the ANN indicator flashes, Announcement
Standby Reception is not yet activated since
the service being received does not provide
the signals used for Announcement Standby
Reception.
To activate Announcement Standby Reception,
you need to tune in to another service
providing these signals. Press ¢
or
4
to search for such a service
(ensemble).
When a service providing these signals is
tuned in, the ANN indicator stops flashing and
remains lit. Now Announcement Standby
Reception is activated.
How Announcement Standby Reception
works:
If a service of the selected Announcement type
starts broadcasting while the Announcement
Standby Reception is activated, selected
announcement type appears and the unit tunes
into the service.
Ex.: When the currently selected
announcement type for Announcement
Standby Reception is “Travel”
After about
5 seconds
The display returns to the source
indication screen.
Note:
After turning on Announcement Standby Reception,
you can change the source without canceling
Announcement Standby Reception. If a service starts
broadcasting the selected announcement type, this
unit automatically changes the source and tunes in to
the service.
Announcement type
Travel:
Warning:
ANN indicator appears.
(either lights up or flashes)
The ANN (announcement) indicator either lights
up or flashes.
• If the ANN indicator lights up, Announcement
Standby Reception is activated.
If a service starts broadcasting a programme
of the selected announcement type, this unit
automatically tunes in to the service.
News:
Weather:
Event:
Special:
Rad Inf:
Sports:
Finance:
Programmes about travel
destinations, package tours, and
travel ideas and opportunities
Warnings about earthquakes,
tsunami, etc.
News
Weather information
Information about events,
concerts, etc.
Special programmes expanding
on current news or affairs
Radio information
Sport events
Reports on commerce, trading,
the Stock Market, etc.
68
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
68
4/2/04, 5:38 PM
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite programme (PTY:
Programme Type) from any source except AM
stations.
• Operations are exactly the same as explained
on pages 18 and 19 for FM RDS stations. You
cannot use PTY Standby Reception separately
for the DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.
• PTY Standby Reception works for the DAB
tuner only using a Dynamic PTY, but not a
Static PTY.
To select your favorite PTY code for PTY
Standby Reception, see page 18.
To set PTY Standby Reception, see pages 18
and 19.
• You can set PTY Standby Reception when the
source is either “FM” or “DAB.”
Searching for your favorite service
You can search for any one of the PTY codes
(either Dynamic or Static PTY).
In addition, you can store your 6 favorite
programme types in the number buttons (see
pages 19 and 20).
• Operations are exactly the same as explained
on pages 19 and 20 for FM RDS stations.
However, you cannot store PTY codes in the
number buttons separately for the DAB tuner
and for the FM tuner.
To store your favorite programme (service)
types, see pages 19 and 20.
To search for your favorite programme
(service) type, see page 20.
• Search will be performed on the DAB tuner
only.
Tracing the same programme
automatically (Alternative Reception)
You can keep listening to the same programme.
• While receiving a DAB service:
When driving in an area where a service
cannot be received, this unit automatically
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS
station, broadcasting the same programme.
• While receiving an FM RDS station:
When driving in an area where a DAB service
is broadcasting the same programme as the
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit
automatically tunes in to the DAB service.
ENGLISH
Using PTY Standby Reception
To use Alternative Reception
When shipped from the factory, Alternative
Reception is activated.
• See also “Changing the general settings
(PSM)” on page 45.
1 Press and hold SEL (select) for more than
2 seconds so that one of the PSM items
appears on the display.
2 Press number button 4 to select “TUNER”—
Tuner category of the PSM settings.
3 Press ¢
or 4
to select “DAB AF”
(alternative frequency).
4 Turn the control dial to select the desired
mode.
• On: Traces the programme among DAB
services and FM RDS stations
—Alternative Reception. The AF
indicator lights up on the display (see
page 16).
• Off: Alternative Reception is deactivated.
5 Press SEL (select) to finish the setting.
Note:
When Alternative Reception (for DAB services) is
activated, Network-Tracking Reception (for RDS
stations: see page 16) is also activated automatically.
On the other hand, Network-Tracking Reception
cannot be deactivated without deactivating
Alternative Reception.
69
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
69
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
ENGLISH
Changing the display pattern
By pressing D DISP, you can change the information shown on the display.
Each time you press the button, the display patterns change as follows:
Large animation display
Ensemble label (name) display
Text indicator*1
Ensemble label
and Frequency
Clock time
Channel
number
Service label (name) display
*3
Service label
PTY code*2
Dynamic Label Segment (DLS) display*4
Clock time display
*1 TEXT indicator: implies the current service received is providing DLS (Dynamic Label Segment—DAB radio
text information).
*2 Each service can have several PTY codes. If a service have several PTY codes, they will be shown in turn.
*3 Ensemble label (primary service) indicator: The different indicator (
) will be displayed when the
secondary service is selected.
*4 Dynamic Label Segment (DLS) will be displayed. See “To select the scroll mode for disc information and the
DAB text—Scroll” on page 48.
70
EN63-70_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
70
30/1/04, 5:22 PM
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service
center.
Symptoms
Disc Playback
Tuner
General
• Sound cannot be heard
from the speakers.
Causes
Remedies
The volume level is set to the
minimum level.
Adjust it to the optimum level.
Connections are incorrect.
Check the cords and connections.
• This unit does not work
at all.
The built-in microcomputer
functions incorrectly due to
noise, etc.
Press the reset button on the
control panel. (Your preset
adjustments will also be
erased.) (See page 2.)
• “Panel Connect Error”
appears on the display.
The control panel is not attach
correctly and firmly.
Remove the control panel, wipe
the connectors, then attach it
again. (See page 55.)
• When “Reset P00” to
“Reset P44” appears on
the display.
There is something blocking the
control panel movement.
Press the reset button on the
control panel. (See page 2.) If
the reset button does not work,
check the installation. (Ex. you
have used a screw which is
longer than specified.)
• SSM (Strong-station
Sequential Memory)
automatic preset does
not work.
Signals are too weak.
Store stations manually.
• Static noise while
listening to the radio.
The aerial is not connected
firmly.
Connect the aerial firmly.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Disc is inserted upside down.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/
CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
CD-R/CD-RW is not finalized.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/
CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW
with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc cannot be ejected.
Disc is locked.
Unlock the disc. (See page 30.)
• Disc cannot be
recognized (“No Disc,”
“Loading Error,” or “Eject
Error” flashes on the
display.)
The CD player may function
incorrectly.
While pressing
(standby/on attenuator), press
and hold 0 (eject) for more than
2 seconds to eject the disc.
Before re-inserting a disc, wait
for several seconds.
• Disc sound is sometimes
interrupted.
You are driving on rough roads.
Stop playback while driving on
rough roads.
Disc is scratched.
Change the disc.
Connections are incorrect.
Check the cords and connections.
No disc in the loading slot.
Insert a disc into the loading slot.
Disc is inserted incorrectly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• “No Disc” flashes on the
display.
ENGLISH
TROUBLESHOOTING
71
EN71-75_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
71
16/2/04, 7:29 PM
ENGLISH
Symptoms
Causes
• Disc cannot be played
back.
No MP3/WMA tracks are
recorded on the disc.
Change the disc.
MP3/WMA tracks do not have
the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> in their file names.
Add the extension code
<.mp3> or <.wma> to their file
names.
MP3/WMA tracks are not
recorded in the format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
Change the disc.
(Record MP3/WMA tracks using
a compliant application.)
Tracks are not encoded in an
appropriate format.
Insert a disc that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate
format.
WMA tracks are copy-protected.
This is normal. Copy-protected
tracks cannot be played back.
• Noise is generated.
The track played back is not an
MP3/WMA track (although it has
the extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Skip to another track or change
the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is
required. (“File Check”
keeps flashing on the
display).
Readout time varies due to the
complexity of the folder/track
configuration.
Do not use too many hierarchies
and folders.
• Tracks cannot be played
back as you have
intended them to play.
Playback order is determined
when the tracks are recorded.
Insert a disc that contains tracks
encoded in an appropriate
format.
• Elapsed playing time is
not correct.
This sometimes occurs during
play. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “No Files” flashes on the
display.
The current disc does not
contain any MP3/WMA track.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/
WMA tracks.
• “No Music” appears on
the display.
The current folder does not
contain any MP3/WMA tracks.
Select another folder that
contains MP3/WMA tracks.
Only <jml> and/or <jma> files
are recorded on the disc.
Insert a disc that contains MP3
or WMA tracks.
• “Not Support” appears
and tracks skip.
MP3/WMA Playback
Remedies
• Correct characters are
not displayed. (e.g. album
name)
This unit can only display
alphabets (capital: A–Z, small: a
– z), numbers, and a limited
number of symbols, and some
accented letters (see page 73).
72
EN71-75_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
72
4/2/04, 5:40 PM
• Download does not
seem to finish.
You are trying to download an
animation of many frames.
This is normal (see page 38).
• Animation does not move.
Temperature in the car
compartment is very low—
(LOW TEMP.) indicator
appears.
Wait until the operating
temperature resumes—until
(LOW TEMP.) indicator
goes off.
• No indication appears on
the display at all.
The built-in microcomputer may
function incorrectly due to
noise, etc.
Press the reset button on the
control panel. (Your preset
adjustments will also be erased.)
(See page 2.)
• “No Disc” flashes on the
display.
No disc is in the magazine.
Insert discs into the magazine.
• “Movie” category settings
in the PSM do not take
effect.
Discs are inserted upside down.
Insert discs correctly.
• “No Magazine” flashes
on the display.
No magazine is loaded in the
CD changer.
Insert the magazine.
• “Reset 08” flashes on the
display.
This unit is not connected to the
CD changer correctly.
Connect this unit and the
CD changer correctly and press
the reset button of the CD
changer.
• “Reset 01” – “Reset 07”
flashes on the display.
• The CD changer does
not work at all.
Press the reset button of the CD
changer.
The built-in microcomputer may
function incorrectly due to
noise, etc.
ENGLISH
Remedies
Graphics
Causes
CD Changer
Symptoms
Press the reset button on the
control panel. (Your preset
adjustments will also be erased.)
(See page 2.)
Available characters
In addition to the alphabets (A – Z, a – z), you can use the following characters to assign names to
CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer) and external component (LINE IN). (See page 53.)
• These characters can be also used to show other information such as disc title/performer, RDS,
and DAB on the display.
Accented letters
Upper case
Numbers and symbols
Lower case
73
EN71-75_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
73
4/2/04, 5:57 PM
ENGLISH
MAINTENANCE
Handling discs
When playing a CD-R or CD-RW
This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs,
CD-Rs (Recordable), CD-RWs (Rewritable), and
CD Texts.
• This unit is also compatible with MP3 and
WMA discs.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc
Center holder
from its case, press down
the center holder of the case
and lift the disc out, holding
it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not
touch its recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert
the disc around the center holder (with the
printed surface facing up).
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after
use.
To keep discs clean
A dirty disc may not be played
correctly. If a disc does become dirty,
wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight
line from center to edge.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough
spots around the inner and outer
edges. If such a disc is used, this
unit may reject the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the
CD player in the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the CD player may
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave
the unit turned on for a few hours until the
moisture evaporates.
Warped
disc
Sticker
Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read
their instructions or cautions carefully.
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played
back on this unit because of their disc
characteristics, and for the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation on the lens inside the
unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time
since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than
that of regular CDs.
• CD-Rs or CD-RWs are susceptible to high
temperatures or high humidity, so do not leave
them inside your car.
• Do not use following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal
stuck to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed
by an ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or
high humidity may cause malfunctions or
damage to discs. For example,
– Stickers or labels may shrink and warp a
disc.
– Stickers or labels may peel off so discs
cannot be ejected.
– Print on discs may get sticky.
Read instructions or cautions about labels and
printable discs carefully.
CAUTIONS:
• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CDs) into the
loading slot. (Such discs cannot be ejected.)
• Do not insert any disc of unusual shape—like a
heart or flower; otherwise, it will cause a
malfunction.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or any
heat source or place them in a place subject to
high temperature and humidity. Do not leave
them in a car.
• Do not use any solvent (for example,
conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,
benzine, etc.) to clean discs.
Sticker
residue
Disc
74
EN71-75_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
74
4/2/04, 5:40 PM
Stick-on
label
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Front:
50 W per channel
Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Front:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than
0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than
0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Equalizer Control Range:
Frequencies: 60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz,
1 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 6 kHz, 12 kHz
Level:
±10 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
5.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other terminals:
SUBWOOFER
Changer control
Steering wheel remote input
Type: Compact disc player
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical
pickup (semiconductor laser)
Number of channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Dynamic Range: 96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit
MP3 decoding format:
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
Max. Bit Rate: 320 Kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) decoding format:
Max. Bit Rate: 192 Kbps
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM: (MW)
522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
(LW)
144 kHz to 279 kHz
ENGLISH
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage:
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System: Negative ground
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 52 mm × 159 mm
Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm
Mass (approx.):
1.6 kg (excluding accessories)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 µV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB
[MW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 20 µV
Selectivity: 35 dB
[LW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 50 µV
75
EN71-75_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
75
16/2/04, 7:30 PM
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil
Hebt u PROBLEMEN met de bediening?
Stel het apparaat terug
Zie de pagina met de paragraaf Het apparaat terugstellen
EN, GE, FR, NL
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
Cover_001A_KD-LH401[E_EX]f.p65
2
0204KKSMDTJEIN
30/1/04, 5:24 PM
KD-LH401
GET0203-005A
[E/EX]
Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
Handleiding voor installatie/aansluiting
ENGLISH
0204KKSMDTJEIN
EN, GE, FR, NL
DEUTSCH
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage
inverter is required, which can be purchased at
JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
FRANÇAIS
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in
elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom
und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr
Fahrzeug nicht über diese Anlage, ist ein
Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.
NEDERLANDS
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des
sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse
NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type
d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de
tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un
revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
Dit apparaat mag worden gebruikt bij elektrische
systemen die werken op 12 V gelijkstroom met
negatieve aarding. Als uw auto niet is uitgerust
met een dergelijk systeem, is een spanningsomzetter
vereist. Dit instrument kan worden aangeschaft bij
JVC car audio dealers.
Parts list for installation and
connection
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit
raccordement
Lijst van onderdelen die u bij
installatie en aansluiting nodig hebt
The following parts are provided for this unit.
After checking them, please set them correctly.
diesem Gerät geliefert.
De volgende onderdelen worden bij het apparaat
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet
Nach ihrer Überprüfung, die Teile richtig einsetzen. appareil.
geleverd.
Après vérification, veuillez les placer correctement. Installeer ze op de juiste wijze, nadat u ze hebt
gecontroleerd.
A/B
Hard case/Control panel
Etui/Schalttafel
Etui de transport/Panneau
de commande
Behuizing/Bedieningspaneel
G
Washer (ø5)
Unterlegscheibe
(ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
Sluitring (ø5)
C
Sleeve
Halterung
Manchon
Huis
H
Lock nut (M5)
Sicherungsmutter (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
Contra-moer (M5)
D
Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Plaque d’assemblage
Sierplaat
I
Mounting bolt (M5 x 20 mm)
Befestigungsschraube
(M5 x 20 mm)
Boulon de montage
(M5 x 20 mm)
Bevestigingsbout (M5 x 20 mm)
E
Power cord
Stromkable
Cordon
d’alimentation
Stroomkabel
J
Rubber cushion
Gummipuffer
Amortisseur en
caoutchouc
Rubberdop
F
Remote controller
Fernbedienung
Télécommande
Afstandsbediening
M
Battery
Batterie
Pile
Batterij
L
CD-ROM
(Image Converter)
CD-ROM
(Image Converter)
CD-ROM
(Image Converter)
CD-ROM
(Image Converter)
K
Handles
Griffe
Poignées
Hendels
CR2025
INSTALLATION
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
EINBAU
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE
INSTALLATIE (INBOUW IN
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD) HET DASHBOARD)
The following illustration shows a typical
installation. If you have any questions or require
information regarding installation kits, consult
your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or
a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit
correctly, have it installed by a qualified
technician.
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen
Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn
Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes
brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das
diese Einbausätze vertreibt.
• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des
Geräts nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem
qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.
L’illustration suivante est un exemple
d’installation typique. Si vous avez des
questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des
kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur
d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie
d’approvisionnement.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer
correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par
un technicien qualifié.
Op de volgende afbeelding kunt u zien hoe de
installatie, normaal gesproken, in zijn werk gaat.
Neem bij vragen of voor meer bijzonderheden over
inbouwpakketten contact op met uw JVC car audio
dealer of een dealer of een bedrijf dat
inbouwpakketten levert.
• Als u niet zeker weet hoe u dit apparaat moet
installeren, kunt u dit beter door een daartoe
gekwalificeerde technicus laten doen.
! Do the required electrical connections.
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen
Anschlüsse vor.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Breng de vereiste elektrische verbindingen tot stand.
Fit the protrusions outside
the unit.
Die Vorsprünge außen am
Gerät anpassen.
Fixez les protubérances à
l’extérieur de l’appareil.
Plaats de uitsteeksels buiten
het toestel.
~
Ÿ
@
*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to
damage the fuse on the rear.
*1 Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß
die Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht
beschädigt wird.
*1 Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale,
faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible
situé sur l’arrière.
*1 Wanneer u het apparaat rechtop zet, moet u erop
letten dat u de zekering aan de achterkant niet
beschadigt.
⁄
¤
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um
die Manschette sicher festzuhalten.
Tordez les languettes appropriées
pour maintenir le manchon en place.
Buig de vereiste lipjes zodat de huls goed
op zijn plaats wordt gehouden.
Removing the unit
Ausbau des Geräts
Retrait de l’appareil
Verwijderen van het apparaat
Before removing the unit, release the rear
section.
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil
freigeben.
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section
arrière.
Voordat u het apparaat verwijdert, moet u het
achtergedeelte losmaken.
1
2
4
3
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann
ziehen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß
das Gerät entfernt werden kann.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la
façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
Plaats de twee hendels en trek ze vervolgens
zoals afgebeeld naar voren zodat het toestel kan
worden verwijderd.
1
Instal1-2_KD-LH401_005A_f.p65
1
18/2/04, 3:43 PM
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der
Anker-Option / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en option /
Wanneer u de steun gebruikt (facultatief)
Fire wall
Feuerwand
Cloison
Brandscherm
Stay (option)
Anker (Option)
Hauban (en option)
Steun (facultatief)
Dashboard
Armaturenbrett
Tableau de bord
Dashboard
Screw (option)
Schraube (Option)
Vis (en option)
Schroef (facultatief)
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne
Halterung / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon / Wanneer u
het apparaat zonder huis installeert
In a Toyota for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.
Par exemple dans une Toyota, retirer d’abord l’autoradio et installer l’appareil à la place.
Voorbeeld: Bij een Toyota moet u eerst de autoradio verwijderen en daarna het apparaat installeren.
Flat type screws (M5 x 8 mm)*
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)*
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm) *
Bracket*
Platkopschroeven (M5 x 8 mm)*
Konsole*
Support *
Console*
Pocket
Taschen
Poche
Zak
* Not included with this unit.
* Nicht Teil dieses Geräts.
* Non fourni avec cet appareil.
* Niet meegeleverd.
Flat type screws (M5 x 8 mm)*
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 x 8 mm)*
Vis à tête plate (M5 x 8 mm) *
Platkopschroeven (M5 x 8 mm)*
Bracket*
Konsole*
Support *
Console*
Note
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von
weniger als 30˚ auf.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de
30˚.
Installeer het toestel met een hoek kleiner dan 30˚.
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Hinweis
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet
werden. Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une
longueur de 8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
Opmerking : Wanneer u het apparaat aan de bevestigingsklem vastmaakt, moet u de 8 mm lange schroeven gebruiken. Als u
langere schroeven gebruikt, kan het apparaat worden beschadigd.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES ELEKTRISCHE VERBINDINGEN
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that
you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal
and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s
chassis again after installation.
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen
wir, daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß
abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem
Einbau a Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet
wird.
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous
recommandons de débrancher la borne
négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les
raccordements électriques avant d’installer
l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la
mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis
de la voiture après l’installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified
rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your
JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers
with maximum power of more than 50 W (both
at the rear and at the front, with an impedance
of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less
than 50 W, change “Amp.Gain” setting to
prevent the speakers from being damaged
(see page 49 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of
the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
Abstrahlblech
Dissipateur de chaleur
Warmte-opnemer
PRECAUTIONS on power supply
and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the
power cord to the car battery; otherwise,
the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the
power cord to the speakers, check the
speaker wiring in your car.
+
L -
-
+
R -
-
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the
car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
Instal1-2_KD-LH401_005A_f.p65
2
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et
la connexion des enceintes:
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes
du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie;
sinon, l’appareil serait sérieusement
endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du
cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez
le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels
NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da
sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.
• VOR dem Anschließen der
Lautsprecherleitungen des
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die
Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in
Ihrem Auto überprüfen.
+
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected
correctly?
Remarques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur
précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter
votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des
enceintes avec une puissance de plus de
50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes
avant, avec une impédance comprise entre
4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
inférieure à 50 W, changez “Amp.Gain” pour
éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page
49 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les
bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS
avec de la bande isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud
après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le
toucher en retirant cet appareil.
VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim
Anschließen der Stromversorgung
und Lautsprecher:
+
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers
grounded in common?
Hinweise:
• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.
• Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer
Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W
anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne,
mit einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die
Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt,
stellen Sie „Amp.Gain“ anders ein, um Schäden
an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite
49 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die
Anschlußklemmen der NICHT
VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit
Isolierklebeband umwickeln.
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch
sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf
achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.
+
L -
-
+
R -
-
FEHLERSUCHE
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen
richtig angeschlossen?
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet
werden.
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung
kurzgeschlossen?
• Ton verzerrt.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren
und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis
angeschlossen?
• Gerät wird heiß.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und
rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?
+
+
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
Opmerkingen:
• Vervang de zekering door een exemplaar met het
aangegeven vermogen. Als de zekering vaak
doorslaat, moet u uw JVC car audio dealer
raadplegen.
• Sluit bij voorkeur luidsprekers met een hoger
maximaal vermogen dan 50 W (zowel achter als
voor, met een impedantie van 4 Ω t/m 8 Ω) aan.
Indien het maximale vermogen lager dan 50 W is,
moet u “Amp.Gain” in de andere stand stellen
zodat de luidsprekers niet kunnen worden
beschadigd (zie bladzijde 49 van de
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING).
• Om kortsluiting te voorkomen, moet u de
aansluitklemmen van ONGEBRUIKTE gekleurde
draden met isolatieband bedekken.
• De warmte-opnemer kan na gebruik erg heet
worden. Raak de warmte-opnemer niet aan
wanneer u dit apparaat van zijn plaats haalt.
VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN bij het
verbinden van de stroomkabeldraad
met de speakers:
• Verbind de speakerdraden van de
stroomkabel NIET met de accu van de
auto; als u dit wel doet, zal het apparaat
ernstige schade oplopen.
• VOORDAT u de speakerdraden van de
stroomkabel met de speakers verbindt, moet u de
bedrading van de speakers in uw auto controleren.
+
L -
-
+
R -
-
+
+
PROBLEMEN OPLOSSEN
• Le fusible saute.
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés
correctement?
• De zekering slaat door.
* Zijn de rode en de zwarte draden op de juiste
manier aangesloten?
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous
tension.
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• De stroom kan niet worden ingeschakeld.
* Is de gele draad aangesloten?
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Le son est déformé.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle
connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un
cordon court et épais?
2
Om kortsluiting te voorkomen adviseren wij u om de
minpool van de accu los te maken en alle elektrische
verbindingen tot stand te brengen voordat u het
apparaat in de auto installeert.
• Aard dit toestel beslist weer op het chassis
van de auto na het installeren.
• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit
sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
30/1/04, 4:18 PM
• Er komt geen geluid uit de speakers.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad kortgesloten?
• Het geluid wordt vervormd.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?
• Geluid wordt door ruis gestoord.
* Is de aarde-aansluiting achter met gebruik van
kortere en dikkere snoeren met het chassis van de
auto verbonden?
• Het apparaat raakt verhit.
* Is de uitgaande speakerdraad geaard?
* Zijn de “–” polen van de linker- en de
rechterspeakers gemeenschappelijk geaard?
ENGLISH
A
DEUTSCH
2
3
NEDERLANDS
Typical Connections / Typische Anschlüsse / Raccordements typiques / Normale verbindingen
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the
vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may
cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the
connector from the car body may be different in
color.
1
FRANÇAIS
Connect the colored leads of the power cord
in the order specified in the illustration
below.
Connect the aerial cord.
Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Note: If your vehicle does not have any
accessory terminal, move the fuse from the
fuse position 1 (initial position) to fuse position
2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive
(+) battery terminal.
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im
Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche
Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am
Gerät hervorrufen.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des
Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können sich farblich
unterscheiden.
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez
attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une
connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des
connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent
être différents en couleur.
Alvorens de verbindingen tot stand te
brengen: Moet u de bedrading in de auto
zorgvuldig. Het apparaat kan door verkeerde
verbindingen ernstige schade oplopen.
De draden van het stroomsnoer verschillen mogelijk
van kleur metde aansluitingen op het chassis van de
auto.
1
Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der
Reihenfolge anschließen, wie in der
Abbildung unten gezeigt.
1
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon
d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur
l’illustration ci-dessous.
1
Verbind de gekleurde draden van het
stroomsnoer in de afbeelding hieronder
aangegeven volgorde.
2
3
Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
2
3
Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
2
3
Sluit de antenne aan.
Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à
l’appareil.
Remarque: Si votre véhicule ne possède pas de
borne accessoire, déplacez le fusible de la
position de fusible 1 (position originale) à la
position de fusible 2 et connectez le fil rouge
(A7) à la borne positive (+) de la batterie.
• Le fil jaune (A4) n’est pas utilisé dans ce cas.
Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.
Hinweis: Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über eine
Zubehöranschlußklemme, die Sicherung von der
1. Sicherungsposition (Erstposition) in die 2.
Sicherungsposition versetzen, die rote Leitung (A7)
an der (+) Batterieanschlußklemme anschließen.
• Die gelbe Leitung (A4) wird in diesem Fall
nicht verwendet.
Verbind de draadbundel daarna met het apparaat.
Opmerking: Als uw voertuig niet beschikt over
een aansluitklem, moet u de zekering verplaatsen
van stand 1 (beginstand) naar stand 2 en moet u de
rode draad (A7) met de pluspool (+) van de accu
verbinden.
• In dit geval wordt de gele draad (A4) niet gebruikt.
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )
An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Diagramm )
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme )
Naar stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (zie schema )
To SUBWOOFER (see diagram )
An SUBWOOFER (siehe Diagramm
À SUBWOOFER (voir le diagramme
Naar SUBWOOFER (zie schema )
)
)
Fuse position 2 / 2. Sicherungsposition / Position de fusible 2 / Zekering, stand 2
Fuse position 1 / 1. Sicherungsposition /Position de fusible 1 / Zekering, stand 1
Rear ground
terminal
Hintere
Erdungscan–
schlußklemme
Borne arrière de
masse
Massaklem aan de
achterkant
15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Fusible 15 A
Zekering 15 A
*1
*1
*1
*1
Black
Schwarz
Noir
Zwart
Line out (see diagram )
Schutz kappen Signalausgang
(siehe Diagramm )
Sortie de ligne
(voir le diagramme )
Uitgang (zie schema )
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Naar metalen ondergrond of chassis van de auto
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
zum Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des
Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la
batterie de la voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage)
(12 V constant)
Naar een onder spanning staande aansluitklem in het zekeringblok die
is aangesloten op de accu van de auto (u passeert de
ontstekingsschakelaar) (constant 12 V)
Yellow*2
Gelb*2
Jaune *2
Geel *2
To CD changer/DAB tuner or another external
component (see diagram )
An CD-Wechsler/DAB-Tuner oder andere externe
Komponente (siehe Diagramm )
Au changeur de CD/tuner DAB ou à un autre
appareil extérieur (voir le diagramme )
Naar CD-wisselaar/DAB-tuner of ander extern
component (zie schema )
*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.
*2 Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts
vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen
werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung nicht
eingeschaltet werden kann.
*2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne
peut pas être mis sous tension.
*2 Voordat u controleert of het apparaat werkt (alvorens het te
installeren), moet deze draad aangesloten zijn. Als dit niet het
geval is, kan de stroom niet worden ingeschakeld.
Not included for this unit
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert
Non fourni avec cet appareil
Niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen
Red
Rot
Rouge
Rood
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Naar een aansluitklem in het zekeringblok
Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Bleu avec bande blanche
Blauw met witte streep
White
Weiß
Blanc
Wit
Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem
Streifen
Gris avec bande noire
Grijs met zwarte streep
Left speaker (front)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Linkerspeaker (voorin)
Orange with white stripe
Orange mit weißem Streifen
Orange avec bande blanche
Oranje met witte streep
(ILLUMINATION)
3
*1
Fuse block
Sicherungsblock
Porte-fusible
Zekeringblok
To car light control switch
Zur Autolichtschalter
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture
Naar de schakelaar voor de autoverlichting
To cellular phone system
Zur Mobiltelefon
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
Naar het mobiele-telefoonsysteem
Gray
Grau
Gris
Grijs
Green with black stripe
Grün mit schwarzem
Streifen
Vert avec bande noire
Groen met zwarte streep
Right speaker (front)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Rechterspeaker (voorin)
Green
Grün
Vert
Groen
Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem
Streifen
Violet avec bande noire
Paars met zwarte streep
Left speaker (rear)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Linkerspeaker (achterin)
3
Instal3-4_KD-LH401_005A_f.p65
*1
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern
vorhanden (max. 200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y
en a une (200 mA max.)
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne met circuit indien aanwezig
(200 mA max.)
Brown
Braun
Marron
Bruin
White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem
Streifen
Blanc avec bande noire
Wit met zwarte streep
Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Interrupteur d’allumage
Contactschakelaar
16/2/04, 6:43 PM
Purple
Lila
Violet
Paars
Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
Rechterspeaker (achterin)
B
Connections Adding Other Equipment / Anschlüsse zum Hinzufügen von anderer Ausrüstung / Raccordement pour ajouter d’autres appareils /
Aansluitingen voor het toevoegen van andere apparatuur
Amplifier / Verstärker / Amplificateur / Versterker
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur et autre
appareil pour améliorer votre système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance
(bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande
à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
• Pour l’amplificateur seulement:
– Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil
et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez
les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
– Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil
est maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir
une qualité Hi-Fi pour les sons reproduits par
cet appareil.
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur
extérieur à cet appareil, diminuez le réglage
du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour
obtenir les meilleures performances de cet
appareil.
Sie können einen Verstärker oder ein anderes
Gerät anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage
zu erweitern.
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit
weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel
des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.
• Nur für den Verstärker:
– Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät
abtrennen und am Verstärker anschließen.
Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts
unbenutzt lassen.
– Der Ausgangspegel dieses Geräts wird auf
einem hohen Wert gehalten, um den HifiKlang zu unterstützen, den dieses Gerät
reproduziert.
Wenn Sie einen externen Verstärker an
dieses Gerät anschließen, stellen Sie den
Verstärkungsregler des externen Verstärkers
herunter, um die bestmögliche Leistung
dieses Geräts zu erzielen.
You can connect an amplifier and other
equipment to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white
stripe) to the remote lead of the other
equipment so that it can be controlled
through this unit.
• For amplifier only:
– Disconnect the speakers from this unit,
connect them to the amplifier. Leave the
speaker leads of this unit unused.
– The line output level of this unit is kept high
to maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced
from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to
this unit, turn down the gain control on the
external amplifier to obtain the best
performance from this unit.
Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Enceintes arrière
Achterspeakers
Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Afstandsbedieningsdraad
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC Amplificateur
JVC Versterker
Signal cord
(not supplied with this unit)
Einzelleitung
(nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Signaalkabel (wordt niet bij dit
apparaat geleverd)
L
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)
Afstandsbedieningsdraad (Blauw met witte streep)
To the remote lead of other equipment or power
aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der
Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à
l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
Naar afstandsdraad van andere apparatuur of antenne
met circuit indien aanwezig
KD-LH401
R
Front speakers
Vordere Lautsprecher
Enceintes avant
Voorspeakers
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC Amplificateur
JVC Versterker
Front speakers
Vordere Lautsprecher
Enceintes avant
Voorspeakers
Y-connector (not supplied with this unit)
Y-Anschluß (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Y-connector (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)
You can connect another power amplifier for front speakers.
Sie können einen anderen Leistungsverstärker für die vorderen Lautsprecher
anschließen.
Vous pouvez connecter un autre amplificateur de puissance pour les
enceintes avant.
U kunt nog een eindversterker voor de voorspeakers aansluiten.
Het is mogelijk om uw autostereosysteem uit te
breiden met een versterker of andere apparatuur.
• Verbind de afstandsdraad (blauw met witte streep)
met de afstandsdraad van het andere apparatuur
zodat deze op afstand vanaf deze apparaat kan
worden bediend.
• Alleen voor een versterker:
– Koppel de speakers van dit apparaat los
en verbind ze aan de versterker. Gebruik
de speakerdraden van dit apparaat niet.
– Het uitgangsniveau van het geluid is hoog om
het hifi-geluid van deze eenheid te behouden.
Wanneer u een extern apparaat op deze eenheid
aansluit, moet u erop letten dat u de
versterkingsfactor van de externe versterker laag
houdt, zodat deze eenheid de beste prestaties
levert.
*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic
body or to the chassis of the car—to the place
not coated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the wire).
Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
*3 Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der
Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs.
Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte
die Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie
den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den
Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter
nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird,
kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.
*3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse
au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un
endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il
est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la
peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut
être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait
correctement.
*3 Bevestig de aardedraad goed met een metalen
onderdeel of het chassis van de auto—bevestig op
een niet-gelakt gedeelte (indien gelakt, schuur dan
af alvorens de draad te bevestigen). Het toestel kan
worden beschadigd indien de aardedraad niet goed
is aangesloten.
CD changer and DAB tuner / CD-Wechsler und DAB-Tuner / Changeur CD et tuner DAB / CD-wisselaar en DAB-tuner
Refer also to pages 56 and 63 of the INSTRUCTIONS.
Siehe auch Seiten 56 und 63 in der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.
Référez-vous aussi à les pages 56 et 63 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.
Zie tevens bladzijden 56 en 63 van de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING.
Connecting cord supplied for your DAB tuner or CD changer
Verbindungskabel, das zum Lieferumfang des DAB-Tuners oder CD-Wechslers gehört
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre tuner DAB ou changeur CD
Verbindingskabel die met de DAB-tuner of CD-wisselaar wordt meegeleverd
Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer
Verbindungskabel, das zum Lieferumfang des
CD-Wechsler gehört
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD
Verbindingskabel die met de CD-wisselaar wordt meegeleverd
Connecting cord supplied for your DAB tuner
Verbindungskabel, das zum Lieferumfang des DABTuners gehört
Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre tuner DAB
Verbindingskabel die met de DAB-tuner wordt meegeleverd
JVC DAB tuner
DAB-Tuner von JVC
Tuner DAB JVC
JVC DAB-tuner
or
oder
ou
of
JVC CD changer
CD-Wechsler von JVC
Changeur CD JVC
JVC CD-wisselaar
KD-LH401
JVC DAB tuner
DAB-Tuner von JVC
Tuner DAB JVC
JVC DAB-tuner
KD-LH401
JVC CD changer
CD-Wechsler von JVC
Changeur CD JVC
JVC CD-wisselaar
• You can connect both components in series as illustrated above.
• Es ist möglich, beide Komponenten in einer Serienschaltung entsprechend der obigen Darstellung
anzuschließen.
• Vous pouvez connecter les deux appareils en série comme montré ci-dessus.
• Beide apparaten zijn volgens bovenstaande illustratie in serie aan te sluiten.
External Component / Externe Komponente / Appareil extérieur / Extern apparaat
KS-U57 *4
KD-LH401
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
Subwoofer / Subwoofer / Caisson de grave / Subwoofer
Signal cord (not supplied with this unit)
Einzelleitung (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Signaalkabel (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)
External component
Externe Komponente
Appareil extérieur
Extern apparaat
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Einzelleitung (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Signaalkabel (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)
CD changer jack
Buchse für CD-Wechsler
Prise du changeur CD
Aansluiting voor CD-wisselaar
*4
*4
*4
*4
C
CAUTION / VORSICHT / PRECAUTION / LET OP!:
• Before connecting the CD changer and/or the DAB tuner, make sure that the unit is
turned off.
• Bevor Sie den CD-Wechsler und/oder den DAB-Tuner anschließen, vergewissern
Sie sich, daß das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.
• Avant de connecter le changeur CD et/ou le tuner DAB, s’assurer que l’unité est
éteinte.
• Zorg ervoor dat de apparaat is uitgeschakeld alvorens u de CD-wisselaar en/of DAB-tuner
aansluit.
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied with this unit)
Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (nicht mit diesem Gerät mitgeliefert)
Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (wordt niet bij dit apparaat geleverd)
L
L
R
R
KD-LH401
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
Subwoofer
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC Amplificateur
JVC Versterker
SUBWOOFER
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Connexion de la télécommande de volant /
Verbinden met de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this receiver using the
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver
steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht
im Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant
la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant
à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.
Indien uw auto een stuurwiel-afstandsbediening heeft, kunt u deze receiver met die afstandsbediening bedienen.
Hiervoor heeft u echter een JVC adapter (niet bijgeleverd) nodig die geschikt is voor de stuurwiel-afstandsbediening van
uw auto. Raadpleeg uw JVC car audio dealer voor details.
Steering wheel remote input
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung
Entrée de la télécommande de volant
Ingang stuurwiel-afstandsbediening
KD-LH401
4
Instal3-4_KD-LH401_005A_f.p65
4
16/2/04, 6:43 PM
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption
(nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)
Adapter voor stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (niet bijgeleverd)
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
Stuurwiel-afstandsbediening (in de auto)